Manual Collection ET 200SP - ET 200SP - 21

Title: Manual Collection ET 200SP
Product: ET 200SP
Version: V21
Publication date: 03/2026
Language: it-IT
Version: 21

Basic information
Distributed I/O system ET 200SP
Notes on Safety and Product Conformity
Documentation, firmware
Aufbewahrung Doku
Intended use
Danger from voltage/current (IP20)
Hazard due to externally supplied plant units
Hazard due to permissible potential difference
Safety functional extra low voltage ET 200SP
Laser ET 200SP
Motion
EMC
ATEX-/UKEX device intended for use in hazardous area
Safety in potentially hazardous atmospheres
Cleaning IP20
Maintenance, repair, recycling, disposal, accessories
Functional safety
Use of radio devices and cell phones
Cybersecurity information
Distributed I/O system
Introduction
Introduction
Siemens Industry Online Support
Industry Mall
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety information
Warnings in this document
Safety-related symbols
Devices without explosion protection
Devices with explosion protection
Intended use
Changes to the device and spare parts
Target group and personnel qualifications
Personal protective equipment
Safe working
Working on electrical parts
Residual risks
Residual risks
Live parts
External power supply to modules
Voltage dangerous to touch due to permissible electric potential difference
Conductive pollution
Overheating
Uncontrolled movements
Unsafe operating states
Behavior in case of emergency
Material damage
Transport and storage
Installation and connection
New properties/functions
Changes compared to previous version
Industrial cybersecurity
Industrial cybersecurity (introduction)
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Security update notification
Basic information on industrial cybersecurity
Definition of industrial cybersecurity
Objectives of industrial cybersecurity
Integrated security concept and security strategies
Comprehensive security concept "Defense in Depth"
Security management
Operational application environment and security assumptions
Intended use
Requirements for the operational application environment and security assumptions
Security properties of the devices
Secure operation of the system
Introduction to secure operation of the system
Hardening measures
Secure configuration
Access control
Handling of sensitive data
Regular firmware updates
Notifications about security vulnerabilities (Siemens Security Advisories)
Data backup
Security checks
Secure decommissioning
Introduction
Securely removing data
Recycling and disposal
Secure operation of the engineering software
Secure operation of CPUs
Introduction to secure operation of CPUs
Secure configuration
User management and access control
Administration of user accounts
Assigning secure passwords
Password management
Setting protection levels
Certificate management
Protection functions
Signed firmware update for CPUs
Secure Boot for CPUs
Web server
Secure Communication/OPC UA
Sensitive data
Backups and data backups
Additional measures for network security
Remote access to CPU
Using a Web server
Remote access via Internet
Remote access via TIA Portal
Recording Security events
Syslog messages
Introduction
Transfer the syslog messages to a syslog server
Structure of the Syslog messages
Secure operation of interface modules
Secure operation of interface modules (introduction)
Data integrity for interface modules
Signed firmware update for interface modules
Secure operation of I/O modules
Secure operation of I/O modules
Data integrity for I/O modules
Signed firmware update for I/O modules
Secure operation of the power supply modules
System overview
What is the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system?
What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules?
How are SIMATIC Safety F-systems structured with ET 200SP?
Components
Application planning
Selecting a BaseUnit for I/O modules/motor starters
Selecting the BaseUnit for I/O modules
Digital, fail-safe, communication, technology or analog modules without temperature measurement
Analog modules with temperature measurement
Selecting a motor starter with suitable BaseUnit
Selecting a BaseUnit for motor starters
Selecting the motor starter
Selecting accessories for motor starters
Selecting potential distributor modules
Selecting a PotDis-BaseUnit
Selecting a PotDis-TerminalBlock
Hardware configuration
Forming potential groups
Basics
Forming potential groups with BaseUnit type B1
Forming potential groups with fail-safe modules
Forming potential groups with Ex modules
Forming potential groups with motor starters
Configuration examples for potential groups
Configuration examples with BaseUnits
Configuration examples with potential distributor modules
System redundancy R1
General notes on operating an ET 200SP R1 system
Example configuration of a system with ET 200SP R1
Commissioning an R1 station
Increased availability
Improving the switchover time of the ET 200SP R1 system
Installation
Basics
Installation conditions for motor starters
Mounting the CPU/interface module
Installing ET 200SP R1
Installing the CM DP communication module
Mounting BaseUnits for I/O modules
Mounting and dismantling BaseUnits for motor starters
Installing and uninstalling BaseCarrier
Installing BaseCarrier
Dismantling BaseCarrier
Installing potential distributor modules
Installing the server module
Mounting further accessories for motor starters
Mounting the cover for the 500 V AC infeed bus
Mounting the mechanical bracket for the BaseUnit
Mounting the BU cover
Wiring
Rules and regulations for operation
Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200SP with fail-safe modules
Safety extra-low voltage (SELV, PELV) for failsafe modules and failsafe motor starters
Requirements for sensors and actuators for fail-safe modules and fail-safe motor starters
Crosstalk of digital input/output signals
Additional rules and regulations for operation of an Ex module group
Additional rules and instructions for operation with motor starters
Protection against short circuit
Operating the ET 200SP on grounded incoming supply
Electrical configuration of the ET 200SP
Wiring rules
Wiring BaseUnits for I/O modules
Connecting cable shields for I/O modules
Wiring BaseUnits for motor starters
Connecting the 3DI/LC module for the motor starter
Connecting the supply voltage to the CPU/interface module
Connecting interfaces for communication
Connecting interfaces for communication
Connecting PROFINET IO (RJ45 port) to the CPU
Connecting the PROFIBUS DP interface to the interface module/communications module CM DP
Inserting I/O modules / motor starters and BU covers
Mounting/disassembly of motor starters
Mounting the fan
Mounting/disassembly of motor starters
3DI/LC module
Labeling ET 200SP
Factory markings
Optional markings
Applying color identification labels
Applying labeling strips
Applying reference identification labels
Configuring
Configuring ET 200SP
Configuring the CPU
Reading out the configuration
Addressing
Process images and process image partitions
Process image - overview
Automatically updating process image partitions
Update process image partitions in the user program
Configuring the interface module
Assigning the F-destination address for fail-safe modules
Module-to-Module Communication (MtM)
Value status
Substitute value behavior
Basics of program execution
Events and OBs
Asynchronous instructions
Protection
Overview of the protection functions
Protection of confidential configuration data
Local user management
Useful information on local user management and access control
Advantages of local user management and access control
From access level to user function rights
Information regarding compatibility
Temporary account lock in case of brute force attacks
Central user management
Useful information on central user management and access control
Configuring central user management in the editor for users and roles
Configuring central user management for an ET 200SP CPU
Logon of central users
Configuring access protection for the CPU
Using the user program to set additional access protection
Know-how protection
Copy protection
Configuration control (option handling)
Configuration control
Configuring
Creating the control data record
Introduction
Control data record for an ET 200SP CPU
Control data record for an interface module
Feedback data record for interface modules
Data records and functions
Transferring control data record in the startup program of the CPU
Behavior during operation
Examples of configuration control
Commissioning
Overview
Commissioning the ET 200SP for PROFINET IO
Introduction PROFINET IO
ET 200SP CPU as an IO controller
ET 200SP CPU as an I-device
ET 200SP as an IO device
Commissioning the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP
Introduction PROFIBUS DP
ET 200SP as a DP master
ET 200SP as I-slave
ET 200SP as a DP slave
Startup of the ET 200SP with empty slots
Removing/inserting a SIMATIC memory card on the CPU
Operating modes of the CPU
Operating modes of the CPU
STARTUP mode
STOP mode
RUN mode
Operating mode transitions
CPU memory reset
Memory reset - Introduction
Automatic memory reset
Manual memory reset
Reassigning parameters during operation
Backing up and restoring the CPU configuration
Overview
Time synchronization
Time synchronization
Example: Configuring and changing NTP server
Identification and maintenance data
Reading out and entering I&M data
Data record structure for I&M data
Example: Read out firmware version of the CPU with Get_IM_Data
Shared commissioning of projects
Maintenance
Maintenance of Ex module groups
Removing and inserting I/O modules/motor starters (hot swapping)
Changing the type of an I/O module
Replacing an I/O module
Replacing a motor starter
Replacing the terminal box on the BaseUnit
Firmware update
Resetting the CPU/interface module (PROFINET IO) to factory settings
Resetting the CPU to factory settings
Resetting interface module (PROFINET IO) to factory settings
Resetting the interface module (PROFINET IO) to factory settings with a RESET button
Reaction to faults in fail-safe modules and fail-safe motor starters
Maintenance and repair
Warranty
Test and service functions
Test functions
Reading out/saving service data
Technical specifications
Introduction
Safety information
Marks and approvals
Certificates
Standards and requirements
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe modules
Shipping and storage conditions
Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
Insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage
Use of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres
Dimension drawings
SIMATIC system rail
Shield connector
Labeling strip
Reference identification labels
Accessories/spare parts
Accessories/spare parts
Lightning protection and overvoltage protection for fail-safe modules
Use over 2 000 m above sea level and extended temperature range
Ambient temperature and installation altitude
CPUs
Interface modules
BusAdapter
BaseUnits
I/O modules
Motor starter
Potential distributor
Restrictions
Calculating the leakage resistance
Calculating the leakage resistance of the ET 200SP
SIMATIC ET 200SP data
Introduction
CPU data
Data of the interface and I/O modules
Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
Preface
Preface
Cybersecurity information
Module overview of ET 200SP
Module firmware corrected for R1 redundancy
Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules
CPUs
Interface modules
BusAdapter
BaseUnits
I/O modules
Encoder modules for Module-to-Module Communication (MtM)
Motor starters
Accessories
Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
BaseUnits manual
Special consideration for BaseUnits with functional versions < 04
BusAdapter Equipment Manual
CPU manuals
Interface module manuals
I/O module manuals
Extended spare parts compatibility
General device manuals
Digital module device manuals
Analog module device manuals
Communications module manuals
Using ET 200SP higher than 2 000 m above sea level.
Ambient temperature and installation altitude
Listing of the modules
Restrictions
PROFIenergy product information
PROFIenergy
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Introduction
Principle of operation
Parameter assignment
PROFIenergy control data records
I/O modules
Digital input module
Digital output modules
Analog input modules
Analog output module
IO-Link Master
IO-Link master
DI operating mode
DQ operating mode
IO-Link operating mode
Mixed configuration
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
Documentation guide
Product overview
BaseUnit BU-Send
Product overview
BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
Properties
Wiring and schematic circuit diagram
Diagnostics by means of LED display
Application planning
Configuration ET 200SP and ET 200AL with ET-Connection
Mounting
Mount BaseUnit BU-Send with BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
Connecting
Connecting BaseUnit BU-Send
Connecting BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
Configuring
Configuring mixed configuration
Technical specifications
Technical specifications BaseUnit BU-Send
Technical specifications BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
User calibration of analog modules
Security information
Introduction
Requirement
Mode of operation
Introduction mode of operation
Procedure
Data set structure
Data set structure
Job data set
Acknowledgment data set
Performing user calibration
Calibration start
Calibration sequence
Calibration exit
Calibration completion
Status and error codes
Time stamp, Date/time
Re-parameterization of the input/output range
Calibration counter
Behavior at CPU-STOP
Behavior with parameter assignment of analog modules during calibration
Example
User calibration (mode = 2)
User calibration
Example: Analog input module RTD (resistance thermometer)
Step A: Start
Step B: Zero-Scale calibration
Step C: Intermediate step
Step D: Full-Scale calibration positive
Step E: Closure
Example: Analog output module +/-10 V
Step A: Start
Step B: Zero-Scale calibration
Step C: Intermediate step
Step D: Full-Scale calibration positive
Abort (mode = 3)
User abort
Module abort
Read calibration values (mode = 4)
Introduction - Read calibration values
Step A: Start
Step B: Closure
Restore factory calibration (mode = 5)
Reset (mode = 6)
Appendix A
Input type/range format: Input channels
Output type/range format: Output channels
Product information on CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)
Documentation overview
CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) - Windows
Technical update - Windows
CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF) - SIMATIC Industrial OS
Technical update - SIMATC Industrial OS
Modules for devices in a hazardous area
Cybersecurity information
Preface
Preface
Recycling and disposal
Documentation guide
Notifications – Always up to date
Scannable code on the product
Scannable code on the product
2D Matrix code (QR code / EAN code)
ID-Link
System overview
Basic assembly of the I/O station
Example configuration of the I/O station with Ex module group
SIMATIC ET 200SP HA or SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system
Basic components of the Ex module group
Ex BaseUnit for Ex power module
Ex power module
Ex BaseUnit for Ex I/O module
Ex I/O module
Coding element
Accessories for the Ex module groups
Overview of the accessories
Reference identification labels
Labeling strips
BU cover (slot cover)
Shield connector
Factory markings
Labeling and coding
Module labeling
Color coding of the I/O module classes
Color coding of the potential group
Color coding of the spring releases
Plant planning
Useful information for use in hazardous areas
Notes on safe use
Deployment zones
Rules for configuring the I/O station
Configuration examples
Example for the configuration of distributed I/O on an ET 200SP HA
Example for the configuration of the distributed I/O at an ET 200SP
Power supply and potential ratios
Power supply (SELV/PELV)
Power supply of the sensors and actuators
Electrical parameters for the safety concept
Intrinsically safe circuit
Grounding of the power supply
Potential groups and Ex power modules
Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage
Shielding
Equipment Shielding
Line Shielding
Voltage relationships in an Ex module group
Maximum mechanical configuration of the Ex module group
Installation
Basics on mounting the Ex module group
Safety measures in hazardous areas
Minimum clearances in the control cabinet
Minimum clearances and cable routing for use in hazardous areas
Overview of the mounting of an Ex module group
Installation
Mounting the Ex BaseUnit for Ex I/O module
Mounting the Ex power module
Mounting the Ex BaseUnit for Ex I/O module
Inserting an Ex I/O module
Inserting a BU cover
Installing the server module
Identification possibilities of components of the Ex module group
Applying labeling strips
Applying reference identification labels
Wiring
Notes on operation
Communication link between basic assembly and Ex module group
Supply of the terminal block
Connections on the Ex BaseUnit and the I/O module
Assignment of the terminals on the terminal block
Supply voltage
Connecting the supply voltage to the Ex power module
Parameters for the Ex power module
Parameters of the Ex power module Ex-PM E
Module/channel parameters
Explanation of parameters
Removal
Overview of the removal of an Ex module group
Removing a server module
Pull Ex I/O module
Removing an Ex power module
Loosening signal cables
Removing the Ex BaseUnit for Ex I/O module
Removing the Ex BaseUnit for Ex power module
Service and maintenance
Actions during operation - Overview
Servicing during operation
Maintenance of the electrical equipment
Replacement of Ex module groups
Replacing an Ex I/O module without changing the type
Replacing an Ex I/O module and changing the type
Replacing an Ex BaseUnit
Firmware update
Displays and interrupts
Status and error displays
LEDs
DIAG LED
MT LED
PWR LED
Interrupts
Technical specifications
Standards and approvals
Currently valid markings and approvals
CE approval
CCCEx approval
UKCA marking for the United Kingdom
Explosion protection
Marking for Australia and New Zealand
Korea Certificate
Marking for the Eurasian Customs Union
Electromagnetic compatibility
Shipping and storage conditions
Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage
Use of the I/O station in hazardous area Zone 2
Technical specifications of subcomponents of the Ex module group
Technical specifications of the Ex I/O modules
Technical specifications - Ex power module
Derating for the Ex power module
Technical specifications - Ex BaseUnits
Dimension drawings
Dimension drawings of the rails
Shield connector
Labeling strip
Reference identification labels
Accessories/spare parts
Accessories/spare parts
Leakage resistance of the I/O station
Calculating the leakage resistance
Cables
Installing the shield contact
Drivers, parameters, diagnostic messages and address space
Parameter assignment
Assignment and form of the module/channel parameters
Diagnostic and maintenance messages
Address space
Service & Support
Service & Support
Information and support
Information and downloads
Mounting rules
Cable cross-sections and ferrules
Device-specific information
Central processing units
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DK03-0AB0)
Introduction
Introduction
ID Link CPU 1510SP-1 PN
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity-relevant information
Product overview
New functions
Hardware properties
Firmware functions
Operating and display elements
Front view of the module
Mode switch
Wiring
Pin assignment
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
Status and error display of the CPU_Introduction
Status and error display of the CPU
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Dimension drawing
Dimension drawings of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DM03-0AB0)
Introduction
Introduction
ID Link CPU 1512SP-1 PN
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity-relevant information
Product overview
New functions
Hardware properties
Firmware functions
Operating and display elements
Front view of the module
Mode switch
Wiring
Pin assignment
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
Status and error display of the CPU_Introduction
Status and error display of the CPU
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Dimension drawing
Dimension drawing of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN
CPU 1514SP-2 PN (6ES7514-2DN03-0AB0)
Introduction
Introduction
ID Link CPU 1514SP-2 PN
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity-relevant information
Product overview
New functions
Hardware properties
Firmware functions
Operating and display elements
Front view of the module
Mode switch
Wiring
Pin assignment
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
Status and error display of the CPU_Introduction
Status and error display of the CPU
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Dimension drawing
Dimension drawing of the CPU
CPU 1514SPT-2 PN (6ES7514-2VN03-0AB0)
Introduction
Introduction
ID Link CPU 1514SPT-2 PN
S7-1500/ET 200MP documentation guide
Information classes S7-1500/ET 200MP
S7-1500 / ET 200MP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity-relevant information
Product overview
New functions
Hardware properties
Firmware functions
Operator controls and display elements
Front view of the module
Mode switch
Connecting
Pin assignment
Interrupts, error messages and diagnostics and system alarms
Status and error display of the CPU_Introduction
Status and error display of the CPU
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Dimensional drawing
Dimension drawing of the CPU
CPU 1515SP PC (F)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Siemens Industry Online Support
Industry Mall
Information about third-party software updates
Notes on protecting administrator accounts
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC (F)
Safety notes
General safety instructions
Notes on use
Product overview
Fail-safe option
Properties
Sample configuration
Components
Configuration of the devices
Operator controls and display elements
Scope of delivery
Unpacking the device
Scope of delivery - System version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM
Scope of delivery - System version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM
Installing
Basics
Hardware configuration
Installing CPU 1515SP PC (F)
Connection
Notes on connection
Terminal and block diagram
Electrical configuration
Connecting devices to networks
Securing cables
Diagnostics, error and system alarm
Status and error display
Commissioning
Notes on commissioning
Initial commissioning
Initial configuration of an Open Controller
Installing license keys
Windows Security Center
Switching CPU 1515SP PC (F) on/off
Functions
Monitoring functions
Retentive memory NVRAM
BIOS description
Introduction
Starting BIOS setup
BIOS setup menus
BIOS setup menus
Information menu
Main menu
Advanced menu
Security menu
Power menu
Boot menu
Exit menu
BIOS setup default settings
BIOS update
Power options
Protective functions for data carriers
Protective functions for data carriers
Enhanced Write Filter (EWF)
File-Based Write Filter (FBWF)
Maintenance
Backing up and restoring data
Change partitioning
Partitions in the delivery state
Change partitioning
Restoring the delivery state
Restoring delivery state using USB stick
Updating software
Windows Embedded Standard 7
Sending the device to customer service
Removing and inserting the CFast card
Technical data
Standards and approvals
Electromagnetic compatibility
Shipping and storage conditions
Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions
Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage
Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres
Module data
CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM
CPU 1515SP PC F, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM
CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 32Bit 4GB RAM - spare part
CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM
CPU 1515SP PC F, system version WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM
CPU 1515SP PC, system version WES7 E 64Bit 4GB RAM - spare part
CPU 1515SP PC (F) + HMI
S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F)
Dimension drawings
CPU 1515SP PC (F)
Accessories/spare parts
Accessories/spare parts
Abbreviations
Abbreviations
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
CPU 1515SP PC2 (F/T/TF)
Introduction
Preface
Scope of validity of the documentation
Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC2
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Tool support (ET 200SP R1)
Information about third-party software updates
Notes on protecting administrator accounts
Safety information
General safety instructions
Notes on use
Industrial Cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity-relevant information
Areas of application
Areas of application of fail-safe CPUs
Areas of application of technology CPUs
Product overview
Field of application
Characteristics
Sample configuration
Components
Operator controls and connection elements
Scope of delivery
Application planning
Basics
Unpacking the device
Identification data
Installation location
Hardware configuration
Installation
Installing the device
Wiring
Notes on connection
Terminal and block diagram
Electrical configuration
Connecting devices to networks
Securing cables
Commissioning
Notes on commissioning
Basic commissioning procedure
Overview
Requirements
Preparing commissioning
Commissioning procedure
Initial commissioning an open controller
Overview
Creating the configuration of the Open Controller
Setting the IP address
Changing the properties of the S7-1500 Software Controller
Downloading a project to the target system
Transferring license keys
Switching the Open Controller on/off
Activating the Wake On LAN functionality
Interrupt, error and system messages
Status and error display
Functions
Monitoring functions
Requirements
Temperature monitoring
Monitoring the CFast card with the S.M.A.R.T function
Operating hours counter
Retentive memory NVRAM
BIOS setup
Power options
Benefits of the function: Sleep mode
Data loss in the event of unexpected shutdown
Data loss in the event of unexpected shutdown
Options for preventing data loss
General information on the write filter
Functional principle of the UWF
Using UWF with WinCC Unified PC Runtime
Options for using UWF with WinCC Unified PC Runtime
Enabling write protection
Maintenance
Display resolution
Partitions in the delivery state
Partitions for the Windows version
Partitions for the IndOS version
BIOS update
Backing up and restoring data
Creating a bootable Restore USB stick
Restoring the delivery state
Updating software
Windows 10 IoT Enterprise (64-bit LTSC 2021)
Sending the device to customer service
Removing and inserting the CFast card
Recycling and disposal
Industrial OS
Overview
Updating BIOS
Commissioning procedure
Commissioning procedure
Configuration loss of the SWCPU after commissioning
System backup and restoring to factory state
Changing system time and date
Time and date synchronization
Security updates
Technical specifications
Standards and approvals
Electromagnetic compatibility
Shipping and storage conditions
Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions
Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage
Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres
Module data
Technical specifications CPU 1515SP PC2
Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F
Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 T
Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 TF
Technical specifications CPU 1515SP PC2 - IndOS
Technical specifications of CPU 1515SP PC2 F -IndOS
S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505SP (F/T/TF)
Dimension drawings
CPU 1515SP PC2
Spare parts/accessories
Accessories/spare parts
Appendix
Siemens Industry Online Support
Troubleshooting
List of abbreviations
Abbreviations
Index
F-CPUs
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Content
Interface modules
Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7155-6BA01-0CN0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Guide to documentation
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Functions
Functions
Configuration control
Connecting
Terminal assignment
Block diagram
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Description of parameters
Configuration control
Startup when expected/actual config differ
Diagnostic interrupt
Hardware interrupt
Insert/remove module interrupt
Substitute value behavior
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Introduction
Evaluating interrupts of ET 200SP
Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt
Triggering a hardware interrupt
Triggering an insert/remove module interrupt
Alarms
Diagnostics alarms
Slave diagnostics
Station statuses 1 to 3
Master PROFIBUS address
Identifier-related diagnostics
Module status
Channel diagnostics
H status
Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP
Load voltage failure on the BaseUnit BU...D
Compatibility
Compatibility of modules
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Dimension drawing
Dimension drawing
Interface module IM 155-6 MF HF (6ES7155-6MU01-0CN0)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
Industrial Cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity-relevant information
Product overview
Properties
MultiFieldbus engineering
Detect active fieldbus
PROFINET IO
PROFINET IO functions
PROFINET IO
Supported Ethernet services: ICMP, ARP, SNMP, LLDP
Port diagnostics
Disabling of ports
Isochronous real-time communication
Minimum update time 250 µs
Prioritized startup
Isochronous mode
Device replacement without programming device (PG) and without topological configuration
Reset to factory settings
Identification data I&M 0 to I&M 4
Firmware update via PROFINET IO
Performance upgrade PROFINET (DFP, FFT, fragmentation)
Media redundancy (MRP and MRPD)
Shared device
Distribution of module channels to submodules
Module-internal or submodule-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)
Interface-local coupling of IO data (MSO)
System redundancy S2
Station extension via ET connection
Value status (quality information, QI) of I/O modules
PROFIenergy
Removal/insertion of multiple I/O modules during operation (Multi Hot Swap)
Module-to-Module Communication (MtM)
Configuration control (option handling)
Setting the time
Time distribution
Use of fail-safe modules
Use of technology modules
Reading out service data
Reference temperature distribution
Diagnostic interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Maintenance events
Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems")
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Interrupts
Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt
Triggering a hardware interrupt
Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt
Triggering of a maintenance event
Alarms
Alarms
Diagnostics alarms
Maintenance alarms
Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP system
Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D
STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device
EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP functions
EtherNet/IP
Applicable modules with EtherNet/IP
Update time of the I/O data
Examples for I/O data mapping
I/O Data Mapping Introduction EtherNet/IP
Example of I/O data mapping for I/O data alignment Byte
Example of I/O data mapping for I/O data alignment Word
Example of I/O data mapping for flexible data alignment
Shared device
Diagnostics
Status and error displays for EtherNet/IP
Modbus TCP
Modbus TCP functions
Modbus TCP
Applicable modules with Modbus TCP
Update time of the I/O data
Examples for I/O data mapping
I/O Data Mapping Introduction Modbus
Example of I/O data mapping for I/O data alignment Byte
Example of I/O data mapping for I/O data alignment Word
Shared device
Diagnostics
Status and error displays for Modbus TCP
Wiring
Pin assignment
Block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Diagnostics: Undervoltage
Configuration control
I/O data alignment
Connection hold time
Hold time after connection reset
Type of fieldbus
Substitute value behavior
Status of supply voltage L+ and feedback voltage of I/O modules
Compatibility
Compatibility of modules
Operation and maintenance
Resetting interface module with MFCT to factory settings
Firmware update
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Dimension drawing
Dimension drawing IM 155-6 MF/2 HF
Interface module IM 155-6 PN BA (6ES7155-6AR01-0AN0)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity-relevant information
Product overview
Properties
Functions
PROFINET IO
Supported Ethernet services: ICMP, ARP, SNMP, LLDP
Port diagnostics
Disabling of ports
Real-time communication
Isochronous real-time communication
Minimum update time 1 ms
Media redundancy (MRP and MRPD)
Device replacement without programming device (PG) and without topological configuration
Reset to factory settings via PROFINET IO
Firmware update via PROFINET IO
Performance upgrade PROFINET (DFP, FFT, fragmentation)
Identification data I&M 0 to I&M 4
PROFIenergy
Configuration control (option handling)
Value status (quality information, QI) of I/O modules
Reading out service data
Reference temperature distribution
Setting the time
Time distribution
Diagnostic interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Removal/insertion of multiple I/O modules during operation (Multi Hot Swap)
Maintenance events
Wiring
Pin assignment
Schematic circuit diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Configuration control
Substitute value behavior
Status of supply voltage L+ and feedback voltage of I/O modules
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Interrupts
Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt
Triggering a hardware interrupt
Triggering a swapping interrupt
Triggering of a maintenance event
Alarms
Alarms
Diagnostics alarms
Maintenance alarms
Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO
Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D
STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device
Compatibility
Compatibility of modules
Operation and maintenance
Resetting interface module to factory settings with MFCT
Firmware update with MFCT
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Dimension drawing
Dimension drawing IM 155-6 PN ST
IM 155-6 PN ST Interface Module (6ES7155-6AU02-0BN0)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity-relevant information
Product overview
Properties
Functions
PROFINET IO
Supported Ethernet services: ICMP, ARP, SNMP, LLDP
Port diagnostics
Disabling of ports
Real-time communication
Isochronous real-time communication
Minimum update time 250 µs
Prioritized startup
Media redundancy (MRP and MRPD)
Shared device
Device replacement without programming device (PG) and without topological configuration
Distribution of module channels to submodules
Firmware update via PROFINET IO
Station extension via ET connection
Identification data I&M 0 to I&M 4
PROFIenergy
Use of fail-safe modules
Use of technology modules
Configuration control (option handling)
Value status (quality information, QI) of I/O modules
Reading out service data
Reference temperature distribution
Setting the time
Time distribution
Diagnostic interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Removal/insertion of multiple I/O modules during operation (Multi Hot Swap)
Maintenance events
Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)
Interface-local coupling of IO data (MSO)
Reset to factory settings
Performance upgrade PROFINET (DFP, FFT, fragmentation)
Wiring
Pin assignment
Schematic circuit diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Configuration control
Substitute value behavior
Status of supply voltage L+ and feedback voltage of I/O modules
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Interrupts
Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt
Triggering a hardware interrupt
Triggering a swapping interrupt
Triggering of a maintenance event
Alarms
Alarms
Diagnostics alarms
Maintenance alarms
Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO
Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D
STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device
Compatibility
Compatibility of modules
Operation and maintenance
Resetting interface module to factory settings with MFCT
Firmware update with MFCT
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Dimension drawing
Dimension drawing IM 155-6 PN ST
Interface module IM 155-6 PN/2 HF (6ES7155-6AU01-0CN0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Functions
PROFINET IO
Device replacement
Real-time communication
Isochronous real-time communication
Prioritized startup
Submodules
Media redundancy (MRP)
Shared device
Isochronous mode
Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)
System redundancy S2
Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems")
Oversampling
Value status
PROFIenergy
Configuration control (option handling)
Use of fail-safe modules
Multi Hot Swap
Module-to-Module Communication (MtM)
Setting the time
Wiring
Pin assignment
Block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Enable configuration control
Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage
Substitute value behavior
Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Interrupts
Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt
Triggering a hardware interrupt
Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt
Alarms
Diagnostics alarms
Maintenance events
Channel diagnostics
Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO
Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D
STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device
Compatibility
Compatibility of modules
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Dimension drawing
Dimension drawing of IM 155-6 PN HF
Interface module IM 155-6 PN/3 HF (6ES7155-6AU30-0CN0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Functions
PROFINET IO
Device replacement
Real-time communication
Isochronous real-time communication
Prioritized startup
Submodules
Media redundancy (MRP)
Shared device
Isochronous mode
Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)
System redundancy S2
Alternating IO devices during operation ("docking systems")
Oversampling
Value status
PROFIenergy
Configuration control (option handling)
Use of fail-safe modules
Multi Hot Swap
Module-to-Module Communication (MtM)
Setting the time
Interface local coupling of IO data
Wiring
Pin assignment
Block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Enable configuration control
Diagnostics (maintenance) undervoltage
Substitute value behavior
Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Interrupts
Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt
Triggering a hardware interrupt
Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt
Alarms
Diagnostics alarms
Maintenance events
Channel diagnostics
Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO
Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D
STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device
Compatibility
Compatibility of modules
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Dimension drawing
Dimension drawing of IM 155-6 PN HF
IM 155-6 PN HS interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0DN0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Siemens Industry Online Support
Industry Mall
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Functions
PROFINET IO
PROFIenergy
Configuration control (option handling)
Use of fail-safe modules
Multi Hot Swap
Connecting
Terminal assignment
Schematic circuit diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Configuration control
Substitute value behavior
Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Interrupts
Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt
Triggering a hardware interrupt
Triggering a swapping interrupt
Alarms
Diagnostics messages
Maintenance events
Channel diagnostics
Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO
Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D
STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device
Compatibility
Compatibility of modules
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Dimensional drawing
Dimension drawing IM 155-6 PN HS
Interface Module IM 155-6 PN R1 (6ES7155-6AU00-0HM0)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Tool support
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity-relevant information
Product overview
Properties
Functions
PROFINET IO
Supported Ethernet services: ICMP, ARP, SNMP, LLDP
Port diagnostics
Disabling of ports
Minimum update time 1 ms
Device replacement without programming device (PG) and without topological configuration
Media redundancy protocol (MRP)
Distribution of module channels to a maximum of 4 submodules
Real-time communication
Use of fail-safe modules
Redundancy switchover times for the fail-safe modules
System redundancy R1
System modifications during ongoing operation on S7-1500R/H (CiR)
Value status of I/O modules
Reading out service data
Reference temperature distribution
H-Sync forwarding
Setting the time
Time distribution
Diagnostic interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Removal/insertion of multiple I/O modules during operation (Multi Hot Swap)
Maintenance events
Reset to factory settings
Firmware update via PROFINET IO
Identification data I&M 0 to I&M 3
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Interrupts
Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt
Triggering a hardware interrupt
Triggering of a pull/plug interrupt
Triggering of a maintenance event
Alarms
Alarms
Diagnostics alarms
Maintenance alarms
Maintenance alarms
Automatic restart of the interface module in case of error
Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO
Wiring
Pin assignment
Schematic circuit diagram
Parameter
Parameters
Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules
Substitute value behavior
Compatibility
Compatibility of modules
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Dimension drawing
Dimension drawing IM 155-6 PN R1
Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Address space
Input data for interface modules with maximum 12 I/O modules
Input data for interface modules with maximum 32 I/O modules
Input data for CPU/interface modules with maximum 64 I/O modules
Evaluating feedback voltage
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Dimensional drawing
Server module
I/O modules
Digital input modules
Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD01-0BB1)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Guide to documentation
Guide to documentation S7-1500 / ET 200MP
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and fault displays
Diagnostics alarms
Load voltage status
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Error in transferring the data record DI
Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF01-0AA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Error in transferring the data record DI
Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring up
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Error in transferring the data record DI
Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring and block diagrams
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Operating mode DI
Wiring up
Wiring and block diagrams
Parameters/address space
High-speed inputs
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Counting operating mode (CNT)
Connecting
Wiring and block diagrams
Parameters/address space
Counting
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Assignment of the control interface
Notes on the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Notes on the feedback interface
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Oversampling (OVS) operating mode
Connecting
Wiring and block diagrams
Parameters/address space
Oversampling
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data records
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for DI operating mode
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating mode
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Oversampling operating mode
Digital output module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF61-0AA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Error in transferring the data record DI
Digital input module DI 8x24VAC/48VUC BA (6ES7131-6CF00-0AU0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Guide to documentation
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameter assignment/addressing
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and fault displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Error in transferring the data record DI
DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity-relevant information
Product overview
Properties
Operating mode DI
Wiring
Pin assignment
Block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Pulse stretching
Chatter monitoring
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and fault displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type
Counter mode (CNT)
Counter
Numerator frequency
Counters and changeover contacts
PROFIBUS restrictions
Counter and DI functionality
Restrictions of the control channel
Wiring
Pin assignment
Schematic circuit diagram
Parameters/address space
Counting
Scaling
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Assignment of the control interface
Notes on the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Notes on the feedback interface
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and fault displays
Interrupts
Measurement
Measuring
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD files
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record 128 for operating mode DI
Assignment and structure of parameter data record 128 for counting operating mode
Assignment and structure of parameter data record 129 for Counting operating mode
Error codes
Compatibility
Operating mode DI compatible with NAMUR 1.0
Functions of the operating mode DI
DI NAMUR version 2.0
Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH01-0BA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Connecting
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Declaration of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostic messages
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Error in transferring the data record DI
Digital output modules
Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD21-0BA0)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Product overview
Properties
Wiring up
Wiring diagram
Schematic circuit diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Error codes
DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Guide to documentation
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameter assignment/addressing
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and fault displays
Load voltage status
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A HF digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Guide to documentation
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Functions
DQ mode
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and fault displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
PC mode
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and fault displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Error transferring the data record DQ
Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF01-0AA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Error transferring the data record DQ
Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring up
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Error transferring the data record DQ
Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
DQ operating mode DQ (valve control)
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Normal operation/Valve control
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Oversampling operating mode
Connecting
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Oversampling
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Pulse width modulation operating mode
Connecting
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Pulse width modulation
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Cam control operating mode
Overview of the possible applications
Parameterization and control options
Configuration via technology object
Parameter setting via hardware configuration with MtM communication
Connecting
Wiring and block diagram
Basics of cam control
Cam control
Start and end position
Hysteresis
Pulsed cam output
Manual mode (MtM)
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Parameters in cam control operating mode
Parameters for module to module communication (MtM)
Address space
Assignment of the control interface
Notes on the control interface
Notes on the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Notes on the feedback interface
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Operation with technology object
Technology object DQ4_CAM
Overview of the configuration steps
Add technology object
Configuring DQ4_CAM
Working with the configuration dialog
Hardware interface
General parameters
Cam parameters
Output parameters
Programming DQ4_CAM
Instruction DQ4_CAM
Call instruction in the user program
Description DQ4_CAM
Input parameters DQ4_CAM
Output parameters DQ4_CAM
Static tags DQ4_CAM
UDT DQ4_CAM_Parameters
Error codes of parameter Status
Reaction to encoder errors
Commissioning the technology object
DQ4_CAM diagnostics
Monitor encoder values and DQs
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS
Parameter data records
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for DQ operating mode
Error codes for DQ operating mode
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for oversampling operating mode
Error codes for oversampling operating mode
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for pulse width modulation operating mode
Error codes for pulse width modulation operating mode
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record for cam control operating mode
Error codes for cam control operating mode
Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF61-0AA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Error transferring the data record DQ
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BH00-0AA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Connecting
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Declaration of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostic messages
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Error transferring the data record DQ
Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH01-0BA0)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Product overview
Properties
Connecting
Wiring diagram
Block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Declaration of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostic messages
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Error codes
Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BH00-0CA0)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring diagram
Block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Error codes
Relay modules
Digital Output Module RQ 3x120VDC-230VAC/5A CO ST (6ES7132-6HC50-0BU0)
Introduction
Preface
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Tool support (ET 200SP R1)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Product overview
Properties
Wiring up
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Switching cycles
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Error transferring the data record DQ
Digital Output Module RQ 3x120VDC-230VAC/5A CO n.i. ST (6ES7132-6HC70-0BU0)
Introduction
Preface
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Tool support (ET 200SP R1)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Product overview
Properties
Wiring up
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Switching cycles
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Error transferring the data record DQ
Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD51-0BA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Error transferring the data record DQ
Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1)
Preface
Preface
Security information
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring up
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Switching cycles
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Error transferring the data record DQ
Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)
Preface
Preface
Security information
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Switching cycles
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Digital input/output modules
Digital input/output module DI 8x/DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7133-6BH00-0BA0)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety instructions
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Product overview
Properties
Connection
Wiring diagram
Block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Error codes
Analog input modules
Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Product overview
Properties
Wiring up
Connection diagram
System structure with BaseCarrier
Schematic circuit diagram
Parameters/address space
Measuring types and ranges
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Interrupts
Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt
Triggering of a maintenance event
Alarms
Alarms
Diagnostics alarms
Maintenance alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values
Representation of input ranges
Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges
Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Product overview
Properties
Wiring up
Connection diagram
System structure with BaseCarrier
Schematic circuit diagram
Parameters/address space
Measuring types and ranges
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Interrupts
Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt
Triggering of a maintenance event
Alarms
Alarms
Diagnostics alarms
Maintenance alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values
Representation of input ranges
Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges
Measured values for wire break
Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD01-0BA1)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring up
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Measuring types and ranges
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Error in transferring the data record analog input
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values
Representation of input ranges
Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges
Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges
Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Connection diagram
Schematic circuit diagram
Parameters/address space
Measuring types and ranges
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Error codes
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values
Representation of input ranges
Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges
Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Measurement types and measuring ranges
Parameters
Description of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values for analog inputs
Representation of input ranges
Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges
Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Product overview
Properties
Connecting
Connection diagram
Schematic circuit diagram
Parameters/address space
Measurement types and measuring ranges
Parameters
Description of parameters
Oversampling
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values for analog inputs
Representation of input ranges
Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges
Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges
Measured values for wire break
Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)
Preface
Open Source Software
Security information
Security information
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Measurement types and measuring ranges
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Measuring range adjustment
Scaling of measured values
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values
Representation of input ranges
Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges
Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges
Measured values for wire break
SIMATIC ET 200SP analog input module AI 2xSG 4-/6-wire HS
Introduction
Preface
Read the manual
Document history
Product compatibility
Safety instructions
Basic safety notes
Safety notices for installation
Access restriction due to high housing temperature
Impermissible repair of the device
Use in hazardous areas
Use in hazardous area
Incorrect mounting
Connecting the device in hazardous areas
Inner temp. - ambient temp.
FM - operation in an enclosure 20 °C
Important notes on using devices (BA X-300)
UL/FM Special conditions for use
Limited range of use with UL
Safety notices according to HazLoc
Do not disconnect the device
Wall mounting with FM approval
Wandmontage mit FM-Zulassung II
Wandmontage_Ex-Bereich
ATEX/IECx special conditions for use
Incorrect installation
Wandmontage_Ex-Bereich
Transient overvoltages of more than 119 V
Cybersecurity information
Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Mounting
Mounting on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
Connecting
Basic safety notes
ATEX/IECx special conditions for use
Connecting device in energized state in hazardous areas
CONNECTING THE DEVICE UNDER VOLTAGE
Transient overvoltages of more than 119 V
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Measurement types and measuring ranges
Parameters
Description of parameters
Oversampling
Address space
Input lock
Min./max. peak value memory
Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Service and maintenance
Basic safety instructions
Device is maintenance-free
Impermissible repair of the device
Technical specifications
New technical specifications 7MH41346LB000DA0
Mechanical requirements and data
Electrical, EMC and climatic requirements
Certificates and approvals
Design of the nameplate
Accessories
BaseUnit type A0 (essential)
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment
Parameter data record 128
Parameter data records 0 and 1
Parameters specifications
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values for analog inputs
Representation of the input range
Analog value representation
Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD01-0BA1)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring up
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Measuring types and ranges
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Error in transferring the data record analog input
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values
Representation of input ranges
Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges
Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
Documentation guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring up
Connection and block diagram
HART function
Use of HART
How HART works
Use of HART
HART communication interface
HART variables
Parameters
Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
Channel/technology parameters
Explanation of the channel/technology parameters
HART mapping parameters
Configuring/address space
Configuring
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Standards and Approvals
Currently valid markings and approvals
CCC approval
UKCA approval
cULus approval
cULus HAZ. LOC. approval
ATEX Approval
IECEx Approval
FM Approval
Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
Appendix
Parameter data records
Parameter data records
Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters
Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping parameters
HART operating data records
HART operating data records
HART directory
HART feature data
HART variable data record
HART-specific settings
HART request and response data records
Analog value representation
Representation of analog values
Representation of input ranges
Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges
Contact
Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)
Preface
Open Source Software
Security information
Security information
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Measurement types and measuring ranges
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Scalable measuring range
Scalable measuring range
Configuration
Evaluating data record 235
Data record 235 - header information
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Errors when transferring the data record
Switchable wire break check
Representation of analog values
Measured value resolution
Measured values for wire break and reference channel mode
Representation of input ranges
Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges
Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors
Representation of analog values for thermal resistors
Representation of analog values for thermocouples
Analog input module AI 4xTC HS (6ES7134-6JD00-0DA1)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Guide to documentation
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Spare part compatibility
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Measurement types and measuring ranges
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Scalable measuring range
Scalable measuring range
Configuration
Evaluate status and limits of scalable measuring range
Data record 235 - header information
REAL representation
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data records
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record (S7 representation)
Error codes (S7 representation)
Parameter assignment and structure of channel parameter (REAL representation)
Error codes (REAL representation)
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values
Representation of input ranges
Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges
Representation of analog values for thermocouples
Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1)
Preface
Open Source Software
Security information
Security information
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Measurement types and measuring ranges
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Scalable measuring range
Scalable measuring range
Configuration
Evaluating data record 235
Data record 235 - header information
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Errors when transferring the data record
Switchable wire break check
Representation of analog values
Measured value resolution
Measured values for wire break and reference channel mode
Representation of input ranges
Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges
Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors
Representation of analog values for thermal resistors
Representation of analog values for thermocouples
Analog input module AI Energy Meter CT HF (6ES7134-6PA01-0CU0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Tool support
Product overview
Properties of the AI Energy Meter CT HF
Area of application
Special considerations for use on the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO
Wiring
Terminal and block diagram
Connection examples
Current transformer selection data
Configuration / address space
Configuring
Selecting the module versions
Selecting the module versions
Module versions at configuration with STEP 7
Module versions at configuration with GSD file
Changing over the user data variant during operation
Recommendations for selecting the module version
Applicable modules
Compatibility
Compatibility of modules
Quick start
Quick start
Reading and processing measured values
Basics for reading measured values
Quality information
Quality information
Quality information in byte 1 of the user data
Quality information with measured value IDs
Operating quadrant
Notes for the detection of wiring errors and incorrect rotating field
Reading measured values from user data cyclically
Read out measured values acyclically using data records
Time-of-day synchronization and time stamp
Energy counters
Overview
Evaluate measured values for energy
Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters
Introduction
Preset start values for the energy meters
Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately
Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit
Starting and and stopping energy meters
Example of measuring and resetting an energy meter
What is the structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143?
Operating hours counter
Overview
Evaluating operating hours counters
Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters
Introduction
Preset start values for operating hours counters
Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately
Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit
Starting and stopping operating hours counters
Limit monitoring
How limit monitoring works
Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring
Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation
Measured variables for limit monitoring
Minimum and maximum values
Minimum and maximum values
Resetting minimum and maximum values
Gate
Measured value recorder
How the measured value recorder works
Start, hold, continue, reset, restart and evaluate measurement
Example of measured value recording
Power failure analysis
Recording for power failure and power return
Mode of operation of the power failure analysis
Power quality analysis functions
Power quality analysis
Power quality analysis status
Harmonics analysis
Reactive power compensation
Detection of residual current
Active factor and power factor
Neutral current In
Monitoring the instantaneous or half-wave values
Phase-based measured values
Phase-based measured values
Parameters
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt
Diagnostic alarms
Diagnostics response
Explanation of diagnostics
Voltage diagnostics
Diagnostics: Overflow/underflow
Voltage swell of the voltage half-wave value
Voltage dip of the voltage half-wave value
Peak values of the instantaneous values for voltage
Current diagnostics
Diagnostics: Overload
Low limit for measuring current undershot
Peak values of the instantaneous values for current
Overcurrent of the current half value
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data records
Configuration via parameter data records
Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module
Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring
Structure of the parameter data records 130/131 for user-data mapping
Structure of the parameter data record for measured value recording (DS 134)
Structure of the parameter data record 135 for data record mapping
Measured variables
Measured variables for connection type
Module versions
Module version "2 I / 2 Q"
Module version "32 I / 20 Q"
"User-specific" module version
Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3"
User data variants
User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data
Measured value data records
Overview of all measured value data records
Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142)
Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 2
Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 3
Structure for energy counters (DS 143)
Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144)
Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 0
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 1
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 0
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 1
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 0
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 1
Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) version 1
Measured value data record of user-defined data record (DS 151)
Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154)
Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155)
Measured value data record for power quality analysis (DS 160)
Measured value data record for harmonics voltage (DS 161)
Measured value data record for harmonics current (DS 163)
Measured value data record for power failure analysis (DS 169)
Information data record on available measured values (DS 170)
Measured value data record for measured value recording 1 (DS 173)
Measured value data record for measured value recording 2 (DS 174)
Tips and tricks
Tips and tricks
Analog input module AI Energy Meter RC HF (6ES7134-6PA21-0CU0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Tool support
Product overview
Properties of the AI Energy Meters RC HF
Area of application
Special considerations for use on the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO
Wiring
Terminal and block diagram
Connection examples
Selection of a current measuring transformer
Configuration / address space
Configuring
Selecting the module versions
Selecting the module version
Module versions at configuration with STEP 7
Module versions at configuration with GSD file
Changing over the user data variant during operation
Recommendations for selecting the module version
Applicable modules
Compatibility
Compatibility of modules
Quick start
Quick start
Reading and processing measured values
Basics for reading measured values
Quality information
Quality information
Quality information in byte 1 of the user data
Quality information with measured value IDs
Operating quadrant
Notes for the detection of wiring errors and incorrect rotating field
Reading measured values from user data cyclically
Read out measured values acyclically using data records
Time-of-day synchronization and time stamp
Energy counters
Overview
Evaluate measured values for energy
Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters
Introduction
Preset start values for the energy meters
Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately
Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit
Starting and and stopping energy meters
Example of measuring and resetting an energy meter
What is the structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143?
Operating hours counter
Overview
Evaluating operating hours counters
Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters
Introduction
Preset start values for operating hours counters
Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately
Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit
Starting and stopping operating hours counters
Limit monitoring
How limit monitoring works
Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring
Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation
Measured variables for limit monitoring
Minimum and maximum values
Minimum and maximum values
Resetting minimum and maximum values
Gate
Measured value recorder
How the measured value recorder works
Start, hold, continue, reset, restart and evaluate measurement
Example of measured value recording
Power failure analysis
Recording for power failure and power return
Mode of operation of the power failure analysis
Power quality analysis functions
Power quality analysis
Power quality analysis status
Harmonics analysis
Reactive power compensation
Detection of residual current
Active factor and power factor
Neutral current In
Monitoring the instantaneous or half-wave values
Phase-based measured values
Phase-based measured values
Parameters
Parameters
Description of parameters
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt
Diagnostic alarms
Diagnostics response
Explanation of diagnostics
Voltage diagnostics
Diagnostics: Overflow/underflow
Voltage swell of the voltage half-wave value
Voltage dip of the voltage half-wave value
Peak values of the instantaneous values for voltage
Current diagnostics
Diagnostics: Overload
Low limit for measuring current undershot
Peak values of the instantaneous values for current
Overcurrent of the current half value
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data records
Configuration via parameter data records
Structure of the parameter data record for the entire module (DS 128)
Structure of the parameter data record for limit monitoring (DS 129)
Structure of the parameter data records for payload mapping DS 130/DS 131
Structure of the parameter data record for measured value recording (DS 134)
Structure of the parameter data record for data mapping (DS 135)
Measured variables
Measured variables for connection type
Module versions
Module version "2 I / 2 Q"
Module version "32 I / 20 Q"
"User-specific" module version
Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3"
User data variants
User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data
Measured value data records
Overview of all measured value data records
Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142)
Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 2
Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 3
Structure for energy counters (DS 143)
Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144)
Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 0
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 1
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 0
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 1
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 0
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 1
Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150)
Measured value data record of user-defined data record (DS 151)
Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154)
Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155)
Measured value data record for power quality analysis (DS 160)
Measured value data record for harmonics voltage (DS 161)
Measured value data record for harmonics current (DS 163)
Measured value data record for power failure analysis (DS 169)
Information data record on available measured values (DS 170)
Measured value data record for measured value recording 1 (DS 173)
Measured value data record for measured value recording 2 (DS 174)
Tips and tricks
Tips and tricks
Analog input module AI Energy Meter CT ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BU0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Tool support
Product overview
Properties of the AI Energy Meter CT ST
Area of application
Special considerations for use on the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO
Wiring
Terminal and block diagram
Connection examples
Current transformer selection data
Configuration / address space
Configuring
Selecting the module versions
Selecting the module versions
Module versions at configuration with STEP 7
Module versions at configuration with GSD file
Changing over the user data variant during operation
Recommendations for selecting the module version
Applicable modules
Compatibility
Compatibility of modules
Quick start
Quick start
Reading and processing measured values
Basics for reading measured values
Quality information
Quality information
Quality information in byte 1 of the user data
Quality information with measured value IDs
Operating quadrant
Notes for the detection of wiring errors and incorrect rotating field
Reading measured values from user data cyclically
Read out measured values acyclically using data records
Time-of-day synchronization and time stamp
Energy counters
Overview
Evaluate measured values for energy
Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters
Introduction
Preset start values for the energy meters
Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately
Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit
Starting and and stopping energy meters
Example of measuring and resetting an energy meter
What is the structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143?
Operating hours counter
Overview
Evaluating operating hours counters
Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters
Introduction
Preset start values for operating hours counters
Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately
Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit
Starting and stopping operating hours counters
Limit monitoring
How limit monitoring works
Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring
Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation
Measured variables for limit monitoring
Minimum and maximum values
Minimum and maximum values
Resetting minimum and maximum values
Gate
Quality analysis functions
Reactive power compensation
Active factor and power factor
Neutral current In
Phase-based measured values
Phase-based measured values
Parameter
Parameter
Explanation of parameters
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt
Diagnostic alarms
Diagnostics response
Explanation of diagnostics
Voltage diagnostics
Diagnostics: Overflow/underflow
Current diagnostics
Diagnostics: Overload
Low limit for measuring current undershot
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data records
Configuration via parameter data records
Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module
Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring
Structure of the parameter data record 130 for user-data mapping
Structure of the parameter data record 135 for data record mapping
Measured variables
Measured variables for connection type
Module versions
Module version "2 I / 2 Q"
Module version "32 I / 20 Q"
"User-specific" module version
Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3"
User data variants
User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data
Measured value data records
Overview of all measured value data records
Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142)
Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 2
Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 3
Structure for energy counters (DS 143)
Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144)
Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 0
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 1
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 0
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 1
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 0
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 1
Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) version 1
Measured value data record of user-defined data record (DS 151)
Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154)
Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155)
Tips and tricks
Tips and tricks
Analog input module AI Energy Meter RC ST (6ES7134-6PA21-0BU0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Tool support
Product overview
Properties of the AI Energy Meters RC ST
Area of application
Special considerations for use on the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO
Wiring
Terminal and block diagram
Connection examples
Selection of a current measuring transformer
Configuration / address space
Configuring
Selecting the module versions
Selecting the module version
Module versions at configuration with STEP 7
Module versions at configuration with GSD file
Changing over the user data variant during operation
Recommendations for selecting the module version
Applicable modules
Compatibility
Compatibility of modules
Quick start
Quick start
Reading and processing measured values
Basics for reading measured values
Quality information
Quality information
Quality information in byte 1 of the user data
Quality information with measured value IDs
Operating quadrant
Notes for the detection of wiring errors and incorrect rotating field
Reading measured values from user data cyclically
Read out measured values acyclically using data records
Time-of-day synchronization and time stamp
Energy counters
Overview
Evaluate measured values for energy
Preset and apply start values for energy and overflow counters
Introduction
Preset start values for the energy meters
Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately
Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit
Starting and and stopping energy meters
Example of measuring and resetting an energy meter
What is the structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143?
Operating hours counter
Overview
Evaluating operating hours counters
Preset and apply start values for operating hours counters
Introduction
Preset start values for operating hours counters
Apply start values from data record DS 143 immediately
Apply start values from data record DS 143 with DQ bit
Starting and stopping operating hours counters
Limit monitoring
How limit monitoring works
Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring
Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation
Measured variables for limit monitoring
Minimum and maximum values
Minimum and maximum values
Resetting minimum and maximum values
Gate
Quality analysis functions
Reactive power compensation
Active factor and power factor
Neutral current In
Phase-based measured values
Phase-based measured values
Parameters
Parameters
Description of parameters
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt
Diagnostic alarms
Diagnostics response
Explanation of diagnostics
Voltage diagnostics
Diagnostics: Overflow/underflow
Current diagnostics
Diagnostics: Overload
Low limit for measuring current undershot
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data records
Configuration via parameter data records
Structure of the parameter data record for the entire module (DS 128)
Structure of the parameter data record for limit monitoring (DS 129)
Structure of the parameter data record for data mapping (DS 130)
Structure of the parameter data record for data mapping (DS 135)
Measured variables
Measured variables for connection type
Module versions
Module version "2 I / 2 Q"
Module version "32 I / 20 Q"
"User-specific" module version
Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3"
User data variants
User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 20 bytes output data
Measured value data records
Overview of all measured value data records
Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142)
Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 2
Measured value data record for basic measured values (DS 142) version 3
Structure for energy counters (DS 143)
Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144)
Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 0
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) version 1
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 0
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) version 1
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 0
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) version 1
Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150)
Measured value data record of user-defined data record (DS 151)
Measured value data record for maximum values with time stamp (DS 154)
Measured value data record for minimum values with time stamp (DS 155)
Tips and tricks
Tips and tricks
Analog output modules
Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring diagram
Schematic circuit diagram
Parameters/address space
Output ranges
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values
Representation of output ranges
Representation of analog values in the current output ranges
Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Connection diagram
Schematic circuit diagram
Parameters/address space
Output ranges
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values
Representation of output ranges
Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges
Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Connecting
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Output types and output ranges
Parameters
Description of parameters
Oversampling
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Representation of analog values
Analog value display for analog outputs
Representation of output ranges
Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges
Representation of analog values in the current output ranges
Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Wiring diagram
Block diagram
Parameters/address space
Output type and output ranges
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values
Representation of output ranges
Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges
Representation of analog values in the current output ranges
Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring up
Terminal assignment
Schematic circuit diagram
Parameters/address space
Output ranges
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values
Representation of output ranges
Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges
Representation of analog values in the current output ranges
Analog Output Module AQ 4xI HART HF
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring up
Connection and block diagram
HART function
Use of HART
How HART works
Use of HART
HART communication interface
HART variables
Parameters
Parameters of AQ 4xI HART
Parameters of AQ 4xI HART
Channel/technology parameters
Explanation of the channel/technology parameters
HART mapping parameters
Configuring/address space
Configuring
Address space
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications of the AQ 4xI HART
Standards and Approvals
Currently valid markings and approvals
CCC approval
UKCA approval
cULus approval
cULus HAZ. LOC. approval
ATEX Approval
IECEx Approval
FM Approval
Appendix
Parameter data records
Parameter data records
Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters
Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping parameters
HART operating data records
HART operating data records
HART directory
HART feature data
HART variable data record
HART-specific settings
HART request and response data records
Example of HART programming (HART command interface)
Analog value display
Representation of analog values in the current output ranges
Analog value display in the current output range 0 to 20 mA
Analog value display in the current output range 4 to 20 mA
Contact
Motor starter
Motor starter (3RK1308-0**00-0CP0)
Introduction
Preface
Responsibility for system configuration and functionality
Change documentation
Siemens Industry Online Support
Siemens Industry Online Support app
Support Request
Recycling and disposal
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Information about third-party software
Product-specific safety instructions
General safety notes
Safety information for hazardous areas
Safety instructions for safety-related applications
Intended use
Current information about operational safety
Declaration of conformity
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product features
Article numbers, properties, accessories
Electromagnetic compatibility
Designing motor starters in conjunction with electromechanical switching devices
Applications
Permissible ambient temperatures up to 1000 m above sea level.
Permissible ambient temperatures at more than 1000 m above sea level.
Device versions
Operating motor starters
Functions
Overview of functions
Intrinsic protection
Basic function/basic parameter
Basic functions/parameters during first commissioning
Rated operational current
Load type
Motor control
Electronic switching technology (hybrid switching technology)
Minimum load current
Control function
Operating modes
Overload protection
Calculating switching cycles
Substation monitoring
System monitoring – Introduction
Response to residual current detection
Upper/lower current warning limit
Upper/lower current limit
Blocking time and blocking current
Device protection model
Temperature monitoring
Asymmetry monitoring
Short-circuit protection (fuses)
Safety-related functions
Self-test
Response to safety-related tripping
Ex motor application
Response to CPU/master STOP
Group fault diagnostics/group warning diagnostics
Inputs
Manual local (local control)
Trip without restart
Trip with restart
Trip emergency end position CW
Trip emergency end position CCW
Group warning
Emergency start
Motor CW
Motor CCW
Quick Stop direction-independent
Quick Stop clockwise
Quick Stop counter-clockwise
Trip RESET
Cold start
Operational trip end position CW
Operational trip end position CCW
Chatter monitoring
Logbook
PROFIenergy
What is PROFIenergy?
PROFIenergy in the motor starter
Firmware update
Parameters/address space
Parameter assignment
Commissioning mode
Parameterization using a GSD file
Slot rules
Data plausibility check
Declaration of parameters
Assigning fail-safe motor starter parameters
Explanation of safety-related parameters
Setting safety-related parameters
Configuring ATEX operation
Examples of LED flashing sequences
Address space
Alarms/diagnostic messages
Status and error displays
TEST/RESET button
Interrupts
Maintenance
Technical data
Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support
Final conditions for safety-related parameters
CAx data
CAx data
Data sets
Reading and writing of data records
Byte arrangements
DS68 Read/write process image output
DS69 Read process image input
DS72 logbook - Read device error
DS73 logbook - Read triggering operations
DS75 logbook - Read events
DS92 Read device diagnostics
DS93 Write command
DS94 Read measured values
DS95 Read statistics
Read/write DS201 device parameter 1
Read/write DS202 device parameter 2
Read DS203 device parameter 1
Read DS204 device parameter 2
I&M data
I&M data
I&M 0: Read device identification
I&M 1: Read/write equipment identifier
I&M 2: Read/write installation
I&M 3: Read/write description
Circuit examples
Connection examples for motor starters
Connecting and operating motor brakes
Example of the correct engineering of a motor starter
Induction machine
Single-phase motor
Resistive load
Gas discharge lamps
Connection examples for fail-safe motor starters
General information
Safety-related shutdown
Connecting the 3DI/LC module for the motor starter
e-Starter
SIMATIC ET 200SP e-Starter (3RD1000)
Introduction
Purpose of the documentation
Change documentation
Validity of the documentation
Required basic knowledge
Siemens Industry Online Support
Siemens Industry Online Support app
Support request
ID link
ID-Link safety instructions
Recycling and disposal
Safety instructions
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Reading out service data
Safety instructions for planning the system
Functional restrictions as a result of the production version
General safety notes
Intended use
Declaration of Conformity
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) according to IEC 60947-4-1
Handling devices carefully
Electromagnetic interferences
Setting up an interference-proof system
ESD Guidelines
Safety instructions for configuration
Non-existent galvanic isolation at the digital inputs of the 4DI (LC) submodule
Safety instructions for installation
Qualified personnel
Five safety rules for working in or on electrical systems
Personal protective equipment, installation and connection
Installing the touch protection for the power bus
Safety instructions for operation
Current information about operational safety
Replacement of modules during operation
Interference caused by radios and mobile phones
Product description
SIMATIC ET 200SP product family
e-Starter ET 200SP
BaseUnits
Basic 4DI (LC) submodule
Fan unit
Touch protection for the power bus
Additional mounting for the BaseUnit
BU cover 30 mm for protection of empty slots
Mounting and disassembly
Minimum clearances
Mounting rules for reducing the thermal stress
Mounting conditions
Interference-proof setup of the e-Starter ET 200SP
Mounting a BaseUnit
Removing the BaseUnit
Mounting the e-Starter ET 200SP
Removing the e-Starter ET 200SP
Mounting the 4DI (LC) submodule
Removing the 4DI (LC) submodule
Removing the fan unit
Mounting the fan unit
Installing the additional mounting for the BaseUnit
Removing the additional mounting for the BaseUnit
Connecting
Connecting the terminals of the 480 V AC power bus of the BaseUnit
Connect the terminals of the 24 V DC power bus of the BaseUnit
Connecting the terminals of the motor feeder of the BaseUnit
Connecting the terminals of the 4DI (LC) submodule
Configuration
Coordination of electrical equipment - selectivity
Switching times
Hot swapping
Intelligent fan control
Configuration in the TIA environment and integration of device description files
Configuring using the TIA Portal configuration software
Use of GSD/PROFINET GSD and HSP files
Compatibility of the PROFINET GSD file
Configuration control
Voltage, current and power measuring errors
Submodules
Submodules
Configuration of a 4DI (LC) submodule
PI extension
Compatibility
Introduction – Compatibility
Compatibility with head modules
Compatibility of the e-Starter ET 200SP with the ET 200SP motor starters (3RK1308)
Compatibility of 3DI/LC module with the Basic 4DI (LC) submodule
Compatibility of the e-Starter ET 200SP with the BaseUnits
Mixed operation of 1-phase and 3-phase loads
Parameter setting
Using OB100
Parameterizing the e-Starter ET 200SP
Data plausibility check
Load parameters
Parameter dependencies
Use and operation
Machine and control cabinet tests with e-Starters ET 200SP
Floating state of the e-Starter ET 200SP when switched off
User test
Functions
Function overview e-Starter ET 200SP
Function overview Basic 4DI (LC) submodule
Measuring
Measurement functions
Monitoring
Monitoring functions
Motor current monitoring
Blocking current monitoring
Current asymmetry monitoring
Ground fault monitoring
Main energy monitoring
Electronics voltage monitoring
Communication connection
Load missing monitoring
Protecting
Protection functions
Electronic motor overload protection
Electronic short-circuit protection
Intrinsic device protection
Control
Priority of control sources
Process images
Reversing
Emergency operation functions
Introduction - Emergency operation
Emergency start function
Emergency run function
Starting mode
Smart Start
Direct start (phase-optimized switching)
Functions of the Basic 4DI (LC) submodule
Introduction
Inputs
Manual - local (local control)
Switch off without restart
Switch off with restart
Switch off emergency end position - motor CW
Switch off emergency end position - motor CCW
Group warning
Emergency start
Motor CW
Motor CCW
Quick-stop
Quick Stop clockwise
Quick Stop counter-clockwise
Trip RESET
Cold running
Operational trip end position CW
Operational trip end position CCW
Maintenance
Maintenance timer
Functions for resistive loads
Requirements for operation of resistive loads
Switching of resistance heating loads and infrared sources
Heating with resistance heating cartridges
Heating with infrared sources
Control-related basics
Use of PID controllers with the e-Starter ET 200SP
Power control with full-wave control for heating loads
Maintenance and service
Maintenance
Repair
Firmware update
Replacing the e-Starter ET 200SP
Securing against restarting
Alarm, fault and system events
Diagnostics options
LED lights
Overview of the device LEDs of the e-Starter ET 200SP
Status and error displays
LED RUN / ER / MT
GRID
LOAD CW / CCW
Overload / Short Circuit / Safety / Power
LED combinations
TEST/RESET button
Diagnostics via the controller
Diagnostic interrupt (error interrupt) is triggered
Diagnostic interrupt (maintenance) is triggered
Extended maintenance
Removal and insertion interrupt is triggered
Reading out the diagnostics in STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
Overview of warnings and errors
Errors and remedial actions
Technical data
Technical specifications in the Siemens SiePortal
Dimensional drawings
CAx data in the Siemens SiePortal
Circuit diagrams
CAx data in the Siemens SiePortal
Connection examples/applications
Connection and operation of asynchronous motors with integrated holding brake
Connection example for asynchronous motor
Connection example for asynchronous motor with electromechanical brake between 2 phases
Connection example for asynchronous motor with electromechanical brake 230 V - neutral point connection
Connection example for asynchronous motor in Steinmetz circuit (1-phase operation)
Connection example for single-phase motor (capacitor motor) - clockwise rotation
Connection example for single-phase motor (capacitor motor) - counter-clockwise rotation
Connection example for resistance loads
Basic 4DI (LC) submodule connection diagram
Appendix
Data sets
Data sets
Byte arrangement
Specifications
Object number (Obj. No.)
Data set 3: Commands with additional values
Data set 68: Process image of the outputs (PIQ)
Data set 69: Process image input (PII)
Data set 70 - 79: Logbooks
Data set 92: Diagnostics
Data set 93: Commands
Data set 94: Measured values
Data set 95: Statistic data
Data set 96: Maximum pointer
Data set 131: Parameter
Data set 132: Advanced parameters 1
Data set 134: Parameter - maintenance
Data set 135: Parameter cyclic process image
Data set 222: Access via object number
I&M data
List of abbreviations
List of abbreviations
Technology modules
TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-6AA01-0BA0) technology module
Preface
Preface
Security information
Open Source Software
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Functions
Detection of counting signals
Measured value determination
Switching the outputs at comparison values
Position input for Motion Control
Fast Mode
Additional functions
Wiring
Pin assignment and block diagram
Configuring/address space
Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object
Configuring
Reaction to CPU STOP
Parameter setting
Address space
Isochronous mode
Position input for ""Motion Control"" technology object
Configuring
Parameter setting
Address space
Control interface and feedback interface
Assignment of the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Isochronous mode
Manual operation (without technology object)
Configuring
Reaction to CPU STOP
Parameter setting
Address space
Control and feedback interface
Introduction
Assignment of the control interface
Notes on the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Notes on the feedback interface
Isochronous mode
Fast Mode
Introduction
Configuring
Reaction to CPU STOP
Parameter setting
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Assignment of the feedback interface
Explanations for feedback interface
Isochronous mode
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error display
Diagnostic messages
Trigger a diagnostic interrupt
Explanation of diagnostic messages
Hardware interrupts
Events which can trigger a hardware interrupt
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Parameter validation error
Technology module TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA01-0BA0)
Preface
Preface
Siemens Industry Online Support
Industry Mall
Security information
Open Source Software
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Functions
Acquisition of encoder signals
Position input with SSI absolute encoder
Counting with incremental or pulse encoder
Measured value determination
Switching the outputs at comparison values
Position input for Motion Control
Fast Mode
Additional functions
Wiring
Introduction
SSI encoder signals
RS422 encoder signals
TTL encoder signals
Configuring/address space
Operating with "Counting and measurement" technology object
Configuring
Reaction to CPU STOP
Parameter setting
Parameter setting
Parameters (SSI absolute encoder)
Parameters (incremental or pulse encoder)
Address space
Control and feedback interface
Isochronous mode
Position input for "Motion Control" technology object
Configuring
Parameter setting
Parameter setting
Parameters (SSI absolute encoder)
Parameters (incremental or pulse encoder)
Address space
Control interface and feedback interface
Assignment of the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Isochronous mode
Manual operation (without technology object)
Configuring
Reaction to CPU STOP
Parameter setting
Parameter setting
Parameters (SSI absolute encoder)
Parameters (incremental or pulse encoder)
Address space
Control and feedback interface
Introduction
Assignment of the control interface
Notes on the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Notes on the feedback interface
Isochronous mode
Fast Mode
Introduction
Configuring
Reaction to CPU STOP
Parameter setting
Parameter setting
Parameters (SSI absolute encoder)
Parameters (incremental or pulse encoder)
Explanation of parameters
Address space
Assignment of the feedback interface
Notes on the feedback interface
Isochronous mode
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error display
Diagnostic alarms
Trigger a diagnostic interrupt
Explanations of diagnostic alarms
Hardware interrupts
Events which can trigger a hardware interrupt
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Parameter validation error
Technology module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V (6ES7138-6CG00-0BA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Open Source Software
Documentation guide
Documentation guide
Product overview
Properties
Functions
Detection of the input signals
Switching the outputs
Additional functions
Connecting
Pin assignment
Configuring/address space
Configuring
Reaction to CPU STOP
Address space
Parameters
Control and feedback interface
Link to summary table
Assignment of the control interface
Notes on the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Notes on the feedback interface
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error displays
Trigger a diagnostic interrupt
Diagnostic alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data records
Open Source Software
Open Source Software
Open Source Software Part 1
Open Source Software Part 2
Open Source Software Part 3
Technology module TM PTO 2x24V (6ES7138-6EB00-0BA0)
Preface
Preface
Siemens Industry Online Support
Industry Mall
Security information
Open Source Software
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Functions
Pulse Train Output (PTO)
Connecting
Pin assignment
Configuring/address space
Configuring
Parameter setting
Address space
Control and feedback interface
Introduction
Assignment of the control interface
Notes on the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Notes on the feedback interface
Enabling the pulse output
Reaction to CPU STOP
Isochronous mode
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
Status and error displays
Diagnostic alarms
Trigger a diagnostic interrupt
Explanation of diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Parameter validation error
Technology Module TM Pulse 2x24V (6ES7138-6DB00-0BB1)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Open Source Software
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Operating modes
Connecting
Terminal assignment and schematic circuit diagram
Configuring/address space
Pulse output (single pulse) mode
Function
Introduction
Output sequence
Pulse duration
On delay
Sequence counter
High-speed output
Configuring
Reaction to CPU STOP
Parameter setting
Address space
Control and feedback interface
Library with PLC data types
Assignment of the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Isochronous mode
Pulse width modulation PWM mode
Function
Introduction
Output sequence
Duty cycle
Period duration
On delay
Dithering
Current measurement/control
Minimum pulse duration and minimum interpulse period
High-speed output
Configuring
Reaction to CPU STOP
Parameter setting
Address space
Control interface and feedback interface
Library with PLC data types
Assignment of the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Isochronous mode
Pulse train mode
Function
Introduction
Output sequence
Number of pulses
Duty cycle
Period duration
On delay
Current measurement
High-speed output
Configuring
Reaction to CPU STOP
Parameter setting
Address space
Control interface and feedback interface
Library with PLC data types
Assignment of the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Isochronous mode
On/Off delay mode
Function
Introduction
Output sequence
On delay
Off delay
High-speed output
Configuring
Reaction to CPU STOP
Parameter setting
Address space
Control interface and feedback interface
Library with PLC data types
Assignment of the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Isochronous mode
Frequency output mode
Function
Introduction
Output sequence
Frequency
On delay
High-speed output
Configuring
Reaction to CPU STOP
Parameter setting
Address space
Control interface and feedback interface
Library with PLC data types
Assignment of the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Isochronous mode
PWM with DC motor motor
Function
Introduction
Output sequence
Duty cycle
Period duration
On delay
Configuring
Parameter setting
Address space
Control interface and feedback interface
Library with PLC data types
Assignment of the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Isochronous mode
Parallel connection of channels
Direct control of digital outputs
Explanation of parameters
Channel configuration
Operating mode
Reaction to CPU STOP
Diagnostics
Parameter
Handling of the SLOT parameters
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error displays
Diagnostic messages
Trigger a diagnostic interrupt
Explanation of diagnostic messages
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Parameter validation errors
Flow chart: Handling of the SLOT parameters
Flow chart: Handling of the SLOT parameters with a one-time change (MODE_SLOT = 0)
SIMATIC ET 200SP SIWAREX technology module TM WP321 1x5VDC#1-4mV/V ST
Introduction
Purpose of this documentation
Use in hazardous area
Incorrect installation
Inner temp. - ambient temp.
Important notes on using devices (BA X-300)
Impermissible repair of the device
Read the manual
Document history
Product compatibility
Checking the consignment
Cybersecurity information
Transportation and storage
Notes on warranty
Basic knowledge required
Safety notes
General safety instructions
Safety notices according to HazLoc
Restricted area of use - Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC
Restricted area of use - Class I, Division 2, Groups A B C D
Description
Product overview
Area of application
System integration in SIMATIC
Customer benefits
Application planning
Functions
Parameter assignment options
Parameter assignment with the PC
Parameter assignment with the SIMATIC Panel
Mounting
Basic safety notes
UL/FM Special conditions for use
Safety notices on use in hazardous areas
Replacing components
Replacing components II
Safety information according to FM and UL
Replacing components III
Do not disconnect the device
Do not disconnect the device II
FM - operation in an enclosure 20 °C
ATEX/IECx special conditions for use
Incorrect installation
Wandmontage_Ex-Bereich
Transient overvoltages of more than 119 V
Safety notices for installation
Access restriction due to high housing temperature
Inner temp. - ambient temp.
Installation guideline
EMC-compliant setup
Introduction
Possible effects of interference
Coupling mechanisms
Five basic rules for securing EMC
Mounting on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
Configuration of the hardware in SIMATIC
Connecting
Basic safety notes
ATEX/IECx special conditions for use
CONNECTING THE DEVICE UNDER VOLTAGE
Transient overvoltages of more than 119 V
Safety extra low voltage - no 100 V...240 V devices
Suitable cables
Connection areas of the SIWAREX WP321
24 V connection
Connection of analog load cells
Connection of analog load cells
Connecting SIWAREX JB to the electronic weighing system and load cell
Wiring diagrams
Load cells with four-wire system
Load cells with six-wire system
Connecting the cable
Shield connection
Connection of RS485 serial interface
Connection of Siebert display via RS485
Connection of the SIWAREX DB
Connection of the SIWAREX DB
Connecting SIWAREX DB
Connect the cable
Commissioning
Commissioning
Factory-set parameters
Commissioning tools
5-minute quick start with the operator panel and the Ready-for-Use software
Start
Factory setting of the parameters
Selecting the calibration method
Defining the calibration weights
Setting calibration points
Calibrating the scale automatically
Performing the automatic calibration
Checking the scale following calibration
Fast commissioning (Quick Start) with SIWATOOL
Service with the SIWATOOL program
Establish communication to SIWAREX WP321
Calibration
Selecting the calibration method
Calibration with calibration weight
Define calibration parameters
Send calibration parameters
Assign calibration weight
Receiving calibration parameters
Checking the scale following calibration
Automatic calibration (without calibration weight)
Define calibration parameters
Send calibration parameters
Defining load cell parameters
Run automatic calibration
Receiving calibration parameters
Checking the scale following calibration
Receive all data
Service with the SIWATOOL program
General
Windows and functions of SIWATOOL
Offline parameter assignment
Online parameter assignment
Available help options
Entering parameters with SIWATOOL
Scale parameters and functions
Parameters and functions
Assigning parameters to the electronic weighing system with SIWAREX DB
DR 2 command code
DR 3 calibration parameters
DR 3 calibration parameters
Scale name
Unit of weight
Gross identifier
Maximum weighing range
Calibration weights 0, 1, 2 and calibration digits 0, 1, 2
Scale interval
Automatic zero adjustment
Decimal places for process values
Maximum tare load
Maximum negative zeroing limit
Maximum positive zeroing limit
Standstill range
Standstill time
Standstill waiting time
Low-pass filter limit frequency
Low-pass filter number
Mean value filter depth
Calibration procedure
Calibration with calibration weights
Automatic calibration
DR 4 Output of calculated calibration digits
DR 4 Output of calculated calibration digits
Calibration digits 0, 1, 2 (calculated)
DR 5 zeroing memory
DR 5 zeroing memory
Effective tare weight - from specification
Effective tare weight (semi-automatic)
Zero weight (semi-automatic)
Current zero tracking weight
Dead load
DR 6 limit value settings
DR 6 limit value settings
Limit reference
Limit value 1 ON, limit value 2 ON, limit value 1 OFF, limit value 2 OFF
Limit value "Empty" ON
Delay time for limits
DR 9 module information
DR 10 load cell parameters
DR 10 parameters of the analog load cells (WP231)
Selection of the sampling rate
Number of support points
Load cell characteristic value
Rated load of a load cell
DR 13 RS485 parameters
DR 13 RS485 parameters
RS485 protocol
RS485 baud rate
RS485 character parity
Decimal place for Siebert indicator
DR 14 SIMATIC interface parameters
DR 14 SIMATIC interface parameters
Selection of process value 1, 2
DR 15 manual tare specification
DR 15 manual tare specification
Specification of tare weight
DR 30 current process values
DR 30 current process values
Gross process weight
Net process weight
Tare process weight
Gross / net weight
Gross / net weight with increased resolution (x 10)
Tare weight
Refresh counter for process values
DR 31 advanced current process values
DR 31 advanced current process values
Unfiltered digit value
Filtered digit value
Refresh counter for process values
DR 32 Message display
DR 32 Message display
Error bytes 0 to 7
DR 34 ASCII main display value
DR 34 ASCII main display value
Content of main display as ACII string
DR 70 SIWAREX DB parameter
DR71 SIWAREX corner load adjustment
DR 80 SIWAREX DB process status
DR 81 SIWAREX DB process status advanced
DR 82 SIWAREX DB device information
Messages
Message types
Message paths
Evaluating messages with the help of SIWATOOL
Evaluating messages with the help of SIMATIC FB
Message list
Message list
System status message list
Technology error message list
Data and operating errors message list
Messages by LEDs on the module
Command lists
Command list
Communication in SIMATIC S7-300/400/1200/1500
General information
Structure of the program "Ready for use"
Advantages of task sharing
Hardware configuration of the electronic weighing system
Calling of function block
Working with the function block
I/O interface of function block
Error codes of function block
Diagnostics messages
Diagnostics interrupts
Hardware interrupts
Technical data
Technical specifications
Certificates and approvals
Ordering data
Accessories
Product documentation and support
Product documentation
Technical support
SIWAREX support
ESD guidelines
ESD Guidelines
Abbreviations
List of abbreviations
SIMATIC ET 200SP SIWAREX technology module TM WP351 1x10VDC#1-4mV/V HF
Introduction
Purpose of this document
Use in hazardous area
Incorrect installation
Inner temp. - ambient temp.
Important notes on using devices (BA X-300)
Impermissible repair of the device
Cybersecurity information
Security information for WP351
Open Source Software
Open Source Software WP351
Product overview
View
Properties
Version dependencies of the functions
Installing
Basic safety notes
Safety requirements UL 61010-2-201
ATEX/IECx special conditions for use
Incorrect installation
Wandmontage_Ex-Bereich
Transient overvoltages of more than 119 V
Mounting on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
EMC-compliant installation
Introduction
Possible effects of interference
Coupling mechanisms
Five basic rules for securing EMC
Connecting
Basic safety notes
Safety extra low voltage - no 100 V...240 V devices
Suitable cables
ATEX/IECx special conditions for use
CONNECTING THE DEVICE UNDER VOLTAGE
Transient overvoltages of more than 119 V
Connection to electronic weighing system
Connection of analog load cells
Connection of analog load cells
Connecting SIWAREX JB to the electronic weighing system and load cell
Wiring diagrams
Load cells with four-wire system
Load cells with six-wire system
Connecting cables to SIWAREX JB
Connection of the SIWAREX DB
Connection of the SIWAREX DB
Connecting the SIWAREX DB to WP341 and WP351
Connect the cable
Commissioning
Calibration with calibration weights
Automatic calibration
Parameter assignment/addressing
Introduction
TIA Portal user program
Commissioning the electronic weighing system with TIA Portal
Call function block FB WP351 [FB351].
Executing commands
Cyclic data exchange via "cyclicIoData"
Reading/writing data records
Design of hardware configuration
Web server
Calling the web server
Reading/writing data records
Operating modes
Weighing steps
NAWI - Non automatic weighing instrument
NAWI - Non-automatic weighing instrument - Filling
NAWI - Non-automatic weighing instrument - Emptying
GFI - Gravimetric filling instrument
CWI - Catchweighing instrument / CW - Automatic check weigher
CWI - Catchweighing instrument/ CW - Automatic check weigher - Filling
CWI - Catchweighing instrument/ CW - Automatic check weigher - Emptying
DTI Discontinuous totalizing automatic weighing instrument
CW - Automatic check weigher - static
CW - Automatic check weigher - dynamic
DR03 Calibration parameters
Overview
Scale name [scaleName]
Weight unit [weightUnit]
Gross indicator [grossIndicator]
Restriction code [restrictionCode]
Set number of weighing ranges [numberOfWeighingRanges]
Multi range / multi interval scale [multiRangeMultiIntervalScale]
Calibration weights 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 [calibrationWeight] and calibration digits [calibrationDigit] 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
Scale interval for weighing range 1, 2, 3 [scaleIntervalWeighingRange]
Initial zero-setting [initialZeroSetting]
Initial zero-setting if tared [initialZeroSettingIfTared]
Automatic zero tracking device [automaticZeroTracking]
Tare device [subtractiveAdditiveTare]
Enable Weight simulation [weightSimulationEnabled]
Automatic zero-setting device [automaticZeroSetting]
Weighing range data in SecureDisplay [weighingRangeDataInSecureDisplay]
Automatic zero tracking in dosing cycle [automaticZeroTrackingInCycle]
Maximum Tare weight (% of max.) [maxTareWeight]
Initial zero-setting device limit negative (% of max.) [initialZeroSettingLimitNegative]
Initial zero-setting device limit positive (% of max.) [initialZeroSettingLimitPositive]
Semi-automatic zero-setting device limit negative (% of max.) [semiAutomaticZeroSettingLimitNegative]
Semi-automatic zero-setting device limit positive (% of max.) [semiAutomaticZeroSettingLimitPositive]
Stability monitoring
Digital signal filters
Operating mode [scaleOperatingMode]
Totalization scale interval dt [TotalizationScaleIntervalDt]
Minimum totalized load [minimumTotalizedLoad]
SecureDisplay interface [legalDisplayInterface]
SecureDisplay version [secureDisplayVersion]
Smallest zoom factor of SecureDisplay (%) [smallestZoomFactorOfSecureDisplay]
DR04 Calibration curve check
DR05 Tare and zero memory
DR06 Configuration of limits
Reference (limits 1 and 2) [limitReference]
Limit 3 - empty [emptyLimit]
Switch-on delay limit 3 (empty) (s) [delayTimeForEmptyLimit]
DR07 Interface parameters
Assignment DI.0, DI.1, DI.2, CI [functionDI0 to functionDI2] [functionCI]
Filtering DI.0, DI.1, DI.2 and CI
Assignment DQ.0, DQ.1, DQ.2
Reaction to CPU stop / failure [behaviourOnCPUStopOrFailure]
Monitoring of digital outputs [monitoringOfDQ]
Reaction of digital outputs to a CPU stop / failure [behaviourOfDQOnCPUStopOrFailure]
Behavior of digital outputs on error [behaviourOfDQOnError]
Substitute value for DQ.0 to DQ.3 on error
Trace memory mode [traceMemoryMode]
Trace rate [traceRate]
Subnet mask, IP address, gateway, device name
Activate Modbus communication [activateModbusConnection1] [activateModbusConnection2]
Modbus TCP Unit Identifier, port, SWAP options
Byte/Word swap options [byteSwap16Bit] [byteSwap32Bit] [wordSwap32Bit]
RS485 protocol
I/O process values 1 to 4 [ioProcessValue1 to ioProcessValue4]
I/O process values 5 to 8 [ioProcessValue5 to ioProcessValue8]
Event hardware interrupts 4 to 8 [hardwareInterrupt4 to hardwareInterrupt8]
Source for weight simulation [simulationSource]
DR09 Read out module information
DR10 Load cell parameters
Load cell type [loadCellType]
Load cell type [loadCellType]
Connection technology [fourSixWireSensor]
Load cell manufacturer [loadCellManufacturer] and load cell order number [loadCellOrderNumber]
No. of mechanical support points [numberOfSupportPoints]
Averaged load cell characteristic (mV/V) [averagedCharacteristicValue]
Nominal load of one single load cell [nominalLoadOfSingleLoadCell]
Power line frequency [powerLineFrequency]
Using a power line filter [PowerLineFilterActivated]
External / internal sensor supply [internalExternalAdcSupply]
Impedance
Maximum impedance deviation (% of impedance reference) [maximumAllowedImpedanceDeviation]
DR14 Dynamic checkweigher parameters - product
Dynamic checkweigher parameters
Product name [productName]
Product length [productLength]
Setpoint value [setPoint]
Parameter relation [parameterRelation]
Tolerance limit TH2 (weight unit) [toleranceLimitTh2]
Tolerance limit TH1 (weight unit) [toleranceLimitTh1]
Tolerance limit TL1 (weight unit) [toleranceLimitTl1]
Tolerance limit TL2 (weight unit) [toleranceLimitTl2]
Monitoring product spacing [checkProductSpacing]
Eject above tolerance TO2 [ejectAboveTh2]
Eject above tolerance TO1 [ejectAboveTh1]
Eject below setpoint [ejectBelowSetpoint]
Eject below tolerance TU1 [ejectBelowTl1]
Eject below tolerance TU2 [ejectBelowTl2]
Belt speed [beltSpeed]
Lifting correction [liftingCorrection]
Filter 1 period (s) [filter1Period]
Filter 2 period (s) [filter2Period]
Filter 3 period (s) [stability1Period]
Characteristic of low pass filter [characteristicLowPassFilter]
Ordinal number of low pass filter [ordinalNumberLowPassFilter]
Cut-off frequency of low pass filter [cutOffFrequencyLowPassFilter]
DR15 Preset tare
DR16 Configuration of weight simulation
Simulate weight
Simulating dosing
Material flow, delay time and opening/closing time
DR17 Dynamic checkweigher parameters - device
Dynamic checkweigher parameters
Length of weighing belt [lengthOfWeighBelt]
Height of the weighing belt [heightOfWeighBelt]
Distance from light barrier inlet to light barrier outlet [distanceOpticalSensorsEntryToExit]
Distance from light barrier inlet to measurement point [distanceOpticalSensorsEntryToMeasurementPoint]
Distance of light barrier to ejection point [distanceOpticalSensorToEjectionPoint]
Delay time ejection signal [delayEjectionSignal]
Duration of ejection signal [durationEjectionSignal]
Speed sensor pulse constant [speedSensorPulses]
Speed signal filter [speedSignalFilter]
Speed unit [speedUnit]
Number of revolutions for calibration/zeroing [numberOfBeltRevolutionsForCalibrationAndZeroing]
DR18 Digital output and transition control
Controlling digital outputs
Enabling transitions
DR20 Configuration of set point [setPoint]
DR21 Configuration of total set point [totalSetPoint]
DR21 Configuration of total set point in DTI
DR21 Configuration of total set point GFI
DR22 Tolerance parameters
Overview
Parameter relation [parameterRelation]
Tolerance limit TH2 (weight unit) [toleranceLimitTh2]
Tolerance limit TH1 (weight unit) [toleranceLimitTh1]
Tolerance limit TL1 (weight unit) [toleranceLimitTl1]
Tolerance limit TL2 (weight unit) [toleranceLimitTl2]
Behavior in case of TH1 error [behaviorTh1Violated]
Behavior in case of TL1 error [behaviorTl1Violated]
Pulse duration for pulse post dosing (s) [pulseDuration]
Number of unchecked weighing cycles [cyclesWithoutCheck]
Capture of weighings into statistics [statisticsData]
DR23 Material parameters
Parameter relation [parameterRelation]
Fine weight [fineWeight]
Trailing weight fine [trailingWeightFine]
Coarse weight [coarseWeight]
Trailing weight coarse [trailingWeightCoarse]
Trailing weight extra coarse [trailingWeightXCoarse]
Blocking time extra coarse (s) [blockingTimeXCoarse]
Blocking time coarse signal (s) [blockingTimeCoarse]
Blocking time fine signal (s) [blockingTimeFine]
Blocking time discharging (s) [blockingTimeDischarge]
External triggered blocking time (s) [externalBlockingTime]
Shut-off correction weight [shutOffCorrectionWeight]
Minimum material flow (weight/s) [minimumMaterialFlowRate]
DR24 Controller parameters
Parameter relation [parameterRelation]
Type of controller [controllerType]
Control factor of proportional controller (%) [controlFactorPController]
Control factor of fine time controller (%) [controlFactorTController]
Max. control access of proportional controller [maximumControllAccessPController]
Proportional controller deadband - upper limit [deadBandPControllerPlus]
Proportional controller deadband - lower limit [deadBandPControllerMinus]
Controller behavior in case of exceeding max. control access [controllerErrorBehavior]
Intervention of fine time controller [interventionTController]
Set point fine time controller (s) [setPointTController]
Adopt corrected fine-/trailing values to DR23 automatically [adoptCorrectedValues]
Max. control access of fine time controller [maximumControllAccessTController]
DR25 Dosing system parameters
Maximum single set point [maximumSingleSetPoint]
Minimum automatic tare weight (% of max.) [minimumAutomaticTareWeight]
Maximum automatic tare weight (% of max.) [maximumAutomaticTareWeight]
Maximum weighing time (s) [maximumDosingTime]
Weighing start options [startOptions]
Cycle time for automatic zero setting (s) [cycleTimeAutomaticZeroSetting]
Number of weighings without automatic taring/zero setting [numberOfCyclesWithoutZeroSetting]
Check stop [checkStopAfterStep0 to checkStopAfterStep7]
Automatic discharging [dischargeMode]
Discharge time (s) [dischargeTime]
Maximum discharge time (s) [dischargeMonitoringTime]
Discharge overlapping time [dischargeOverlappingTime]
No. of optimized loadings (OIML R-107) [NumberOfOptimizedLoadings]
Dosing signals
Delete tare in weighing step 0 [deleteTareStep0]
DR28 Configuration of additional string for protocols
Log with additional string [addAdditionalText]
Log single loadings (OIML R-107) [logSingleLoadings]
Protocol storage method (International Organization of Legal Metrology) [protocolLoggingMode]
DR29 Configuration of technology messages
DR30 Read out process state
Overview
Digits unfiltered (linearized) [unfilteredDigitsNotLin]
Digits filtered by F1 [filteredDigits1]
Digits filtered by F2 [filteredDigits2]
Digits filtered by F3 [filteredDigits3]
Status DI.0, DI.1, DI.2 and CI.0 [statusDI0] [statusDI1] [statusDI2] [statusCI0]
Status DQ.0, DQ.1 and DQ.2 [statusDQ0 to statusDQ2]
Refresh counter [refreshcounter]
Current load cell signal voltage (mV) [loadCellSignalVoltage]
Load cell impedance (Ohm) [loadCellImpedance]
Current load cell SEN voltage (V) [loadCellSenseVoltage]
Current fine weight [currentFineWeight]
Current trailing weight [currentTrailingWeightFine]
Tolerance limits (weight unit) [toleranceLimitTh2] [toleranceLimitTh1] [toleranceLimitTl1] [toleranceLimitTl2]
Gross process weight 1 [grossProcessWeight1], Net process weight 1 [netProcessWeight1], Tare process weight [tareProcessWeight]
Gross weight [grossWeight], Net weight [netWeight], Tare weight [tareWeight]
Gross/net weight x10 [netWeightX10]
Gross process weight 2 [grossProcessWeight2], Net process weight 2 [netProcessWeight2]
Last net process weight [lastNetProcessWeight], Last net weight [lastNetWeight]
Totalizer 1 [totalizer1] and Totalizer 2 [totalizer2]
Youngest protocol ID [youngestLogId]
Date & time
Current dosing step [subDosingStep]
Number of dosings in continuous mode [dosingsInContinuousMode]
Difference set point / actual value [differenceSetPointActualValue]
DR32 Read out error messages
Overview
Operating errors, technology messages, data/command errors
DR34 Weight indicator
DR37 Training data dynamic checkweigher
Training data dynamic checkweigher
DR38 Advanced diagnostic data
DR39 Statistical data
DR45 Protocol request
DR46 Read out protocol content
Overview
Oldest protocol ID [oldestLogId]
Youngest protocol ID [latestLogId]
Selected protocol ID, numerical [selectedLogId]
Protocol string [log]
Checksum, date, time
DR47 Read out logbook content
DR 70 SIWAREX DB parameter
DR 80 / DR 81 / DR 82 SIWAREX DB process status and device information
DR156 Security Audit Log Entry
Commands
Overview
Commands
Command groups of the electronic weighing system
Communication via Modbus
Introduction
Principle of data transmission
Data record concept
Command mailboxes
Reading registers
Writing registers
Operation requiring official calibration
Prepare calibration of the scales
Checking parameters relevant to the calibration
Service and maintenance
Device is maintenance-free
Disposal
Disposal
Special disposal required
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Message and error types
Message and error types, WP351-specific
Evaluating errors/messages using the Web server
Evaluating errors/messages using the FB
Operating errors
Operating errors
Technology messages
Data and command errors
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR03
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR05 and DR06
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR07
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR10
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR20 to DR24
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR25 and DR28
Diagnostic messages
Error codes and corrective measures
Trigger a diagnostic interrupt
Meaning of the LEDs
Hardware interrupts
Technical data
Technical specifications
Certificates and approvals
Product documentation and support
Product documentation
Technical support
SIWAREX support
Ordering data
Accessories
Technology Module TM SIWAREX WP341 HF
Introduction
Purpose of this document
Use in hazardous area
Incorrect installation
Inner temp. - ambient temp.
Important notes on using devices (BA X-300)
Impermissible repair of the device
Security information
Security information for WP351
Open Source Software
Open Source Software WP351
Product overview
View
Properties
Version dependencies of the functions
Installing
Basic safety notes
Safety requirements UL 61010-2-201
ATEX/IECx special conditions for use
Incorrect installation
Wandmontage_Ex-Bereich
Transient overvoltages of more than 119 V
Mounting on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
EMC-compliant installation
Introduction
Possible effects of interference
Coupling mechanisms
Five basic rules for securing EMC
Connecting
Basic safety notes
Safety extra low voltage - no 100 V...240 V devices
Suitable cables
ATEX/IECx special conditions for use
CONNECTING THE DEVICE UNDER VOLTAGE
Transient overvoltages of more than 119 V
Connection to electronic weighing system
Connection of analog load cells
Connection of analog load cells
Connecting SIWAREX JB to the electronic weighing system and load cell
Wiring diagrams
Load cells with four-wire system
Load cells with six-wire system
Connecting cables to SIWAREX JB
Connection of the SIWAREX DB
Connection of the SIWAREX DB
Connecting the SIWAREX DB to WP341 and WP351
Connect the cable
Commissioning
Performing calibration
Calibration of the speed
Calibration of the speed
Specification of known speed parameters
Calibration of weight measurement
Overview
Determination of zero point
Span calibration by weight
Automatic span calibration with load cell data
Span calibration by test chain
Span calibration with known material flow
Parameter assignment/addressing
Introduction
TIA Portal user program
Commissioning the electronic weighing system with TIA Portal
Call function block FB WP341 [FB341].
Executing commands
Cyclic data exchange via "cyclicIoData"
Reading/writing data records
Design of hardware configuration
Automatic time synchronization
Web server
Calling the web server
Reading/writing data records
DR03 Calibration parameters
Scale name [scaleName]
Measurement unit for load and speed [unitBeltLoad]
Unit for the flow rate [unitFlowRate]
Scale intervals of weight, belt load and totalizers
Design flow rate [designFlowRate]
Weigh length [weighLength]
Belt length (1 complete revolution) [beltLength]
Number of belt revolutions for calibration [beltRevolutionsForCalibration]
Speed input [speedInput]
Speed input [speedInput]
Design speed [designSpeed]
Speed factor under load [speedFactorUnderLoad]
Load at 'Speed factor under load' [loadAtSpeedFactor]
Speed sensor pulses [speedSensorPulses]
Zero calibration digits [zeroCalibrationDigits]
Span calibration digits [spanCalibrationDigits]
Calibration weight (test weight) [calibrationTestWeight]
Calibration load (test chain) [calibrationLoad]
Calibration quantity (material test) [calibrationQuantity]
Enable simulation
Operating mode [operatingMode]
Belt load signal filter [loadSignalFilter] and speed [speedSignalFilter]
Speed signal filter [speedSignalFilter]
DR04 Correction factor [correctionFactor]
DR05 Correction curve
DR06 Parameterize limits
Maximum negative zero setting range [zeroSettingLimitNegative] and maximum positive zero setting range [zeroSettingLimitPositive]
Minimum flow rate [minimumFlowRate]
Maximum flow rate [maximumFlowRate]
Delay time flow rate limits [delayTimeFlowRateLimits]
Minimum belt speed [minimumBeltSpeed]
Maximum belt speed [maximumBeltSpeed]
Delay time belt speed limits [delayTimeBeltSpeedLimits]
Minimum belt load [minimumBeltLoad]
Maximum belt load [maximumBeltLoad]
Delay time belt load limits [delayBeltLoadLimits]
Minimum belt load for totalizing [minimumBeltLoadForTotalizing]
DR07 Interface parameters
Digital inputs DI.0 to DI.2 [functionDI0 bis functionDI2]
Filtering DI.0 to DI.2
Digital output DQ.0 to DQ.2
Signal logic DQ.0 to DQ.2 [signalLogicDQ0 bis signalLogicDQ2]
Signal logic DI.0 to DI.3 [signalLogicDI0 bis signalLogicDI2]
DQ monitoring [monitoringOfDQ]
Substitute value for DQ.0 to DQ.2 on error [substituteValueDQ0 to substituteValueDQ2]
Reaction to CPU stop / failure [behaviourOnCPUStopOrFailure]
Reaction of digital outputs to a CPU stop / failure [behaviourOfDQOnCPUStopOrFailure]
Behavior of digital outputs on error [behaviourOfDQOnError]
Trace rate [traceRate]
Trace memory mode [traceMemoryMode]
Load per pulse [loadPerPulsRemoteTotalizer] [pulsDurationRemoteTotalizer] [pauseDurationRemoteTotalizer]
Subnet mask, IP address, gateway, device name
Unit Ident. Modbus connection 1 [modbusUnitIdentifier1]
Modbus TCP enable connection 1 [modbusPort1]
Byte/Word swap options [byteSwapTextFields] [byteSwap16Bit] [byteSwap32Bit] [wordSwap32Bit]
I/O process values 1 to 4 [ioProcessValue1 to ioProcessValue4]
I/O process values 5 to 8 [ioProcessValue5 to ioProcessValue8]
Hardware interrupt 1 to 8 [hardwareInterrupt1 to hardwareInterrupt8]
Source for simulation values [simulationSource]
Signal logic hardware interrupt 1 to 8 [alarmLogic1 to alarmLogic8]
DR09 Read out module information
DR10 Load cell parameters
Load cell input [loadCellType]
Mains frequency [mainsFrequency]
Mains frequency filter [mainsFrequencyFilterActivated]
4-wire / 6-wire sensor [fourSixWireSensor]
External / internal sensor supply [internalExternalAdcSupply]
No. of mechanical support points [numberOfSupportPoints]
Averaged load cell characteristic value (mV/V) [averagedCharacteristicValue]
Capacity of one single load cell [capacityOfOneSingleLoadCell]
Impedance reference (Ohm) [impedanceReference]
Maximum impedance deviation (% of impedance reference) [maximumAllowedImpedanceDeviation]
Load cell manufacturer [loadCellManufacturer] and load cell order number [loadCellOrderNumber]
DR14 Material test reference [referenceWeightForMaterialTest]
DR15 Configuration of technology messages
DR16 Simulation
Simulating process values
DR17 Incline angle [inclineAngle]
DR18 External speed value [externalSpeed]
DR28 Add user tag to log [userTag] [addLogTag]
DR30 Scale status
Overview
DR31 Scale status extended
Drag indicator "belt load" (unfiltered) [dragIndicatorBeltLoad]
DR32 Read out error messages
DR33 Totalizers
DR 33 Totalizers
General Totalizer T1 [generalTotalizerT1]
Totalizer T2 [totalizerT2]
Totalizer T3 [totalizerT3], Totalizer T4 [totalizerT4], Totalizer T5 [totalizerT5]
Totalizer T6 [totalizerT6]
DR34 Current display
DR 34 ASCII main display value
Content of main display as ASCII string
DR36 Temporary data
Temporary data
Stop watch
Progress dynamic command (%)
DR45 Protocol request
DR46 Read out protocol content
Overview
Oldest protocol ID [oldestLogId]
Youngest protocol ID [latestLogId]
Selected protocol ID, numerical [selectedLogId]
Protocol string [log]
Checksum, date, time
DR47 Read out logbook content
DR 70 SIWAREX DB parameter
DR 80 / DR 81 / DR 82 SIWAREX DB process status and device information
DR156 Security Audit Log Entry
Commands
Overview
Commands
Command groups of the electronic weighing system
Communication via Modbus
Introduction
Principle of data transmission
Data record concept
Command mailboxes
Reading registers
Writing registers
Service and maintenance
Device is maintenance-free
Disposal
Disposal
Special disposal required
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Message and error types
Evaluating errors/messages using the Web server
Evaluating errors/messages using the FB
Operating errors
Operating errors
Technology messages
Data and command errors
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR03
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR04, DR05 and DR06
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR07
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR10, DR11, DR14, DR16, DR17, DR18 and DR28
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR30
Add info [errorAddInfo] starting DR70
Diagnostic messages
Error codes and corrective measures
Trigger a diagnostic interrupt
Meaning of the LEDs
Hardware interrupts
Technical data
Technical specifications
Certificates and approvals
Product documentation and support
Product documentation
Technical support
SIWAREX support
Ordering data
Accessories
SIMATIC ET 200SP SIWAREX technology module TM WP361 1x10VDC#1-4mV/V HF
Introduction
Purpose of this document
Inner temp. - ambient temp.
Impermissible repair of the device
Cybersecurity information
Security-notes SIWAREX WP361
Open Source Software
Open Source Software WP351
Product overview
View
Properties
Version dependencies of the functions
Installing
Basic safety notes
Safety requirements UL 61010-2-201
Mounting on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
EMC-compliant installation
Introduction
Possible effects of interference
Coupling mechanisms
Five basic rules for securing EMC
Connecting
Basic safety notes
Safety extra low voltage - no 100 V...240 V devices
Suitable cables
Connection to electronic weighing system
Connection of analog load cells
Connection of analog load cells
Connecting SIWAREX JB to the electronic weighing system and load cell
Wiring diagrams
Load cells with four-wire system
Load cells with six-wire system
Connecting cables to SIWAREX JB
Connection of the SIWAREX DB
Connection of the SIWAREX DB
Connecting the SIWAREX DB to WP341, WP351 and WP361
Connect the cable
Parameter assignment/addressing
Introduction
TIA Portal user program
Commissioning the electronic weighing system with TIA Portal
Calling the function block FB WP361 [FB361]
Executing commands
Cyclic data exchange via "cyclicIoData"
Reading/writing data records
Design of hardware configuration
Automatic time synchronization
Web server
Calling the web server
Reading/writing data records
Calibration Parameter (DR3)
Scale name [scaleName]
Weight unit for flow rate [unitWeightFlowRate]
Weight unit for totalizer [unitTotalizers]
Time unit for flow rate [unitTimeFlowRate]
Scale interval of weight [scaleIntervalWeight]
Scale interval of totalizers and flow rate [totalizationFlowRateInterval]
Maximum scale capacity [maxWeight]
Negative/ positive zero setting range [maxZeroSettingLimitNegative]/ [maxZeroSettingLimitPositive]<
Current zero-setting weight [zeroSettingWeight]
Empty limit [emptyLimit]
Calibration weight 0, 1 [calibrationWeight] and calibration digits [calibrationDigit] 0, 1
Enable simulation [simulationEnabled]
Correction Factor (DR4)
Correction Factor (DR04) [correctionFactor]
Loss In Weight Parameter (DR5)
Weight and flow rate filter
Loss-in-weight scale (DR05)
Material name [materialName]
Maximum fill weight [fillWeight]
Design flow rate [designFlowRate]
Start/stop filling limit [startFillingLimit] / [stopFillingLimit]
Filling time [fillingTime]
Settling time after filling [settlingTimeAfterFilling]
Displayed flow rate during filling [displayedFlowRateWhileFilling]
Dosing behaviour at operation error [dosingBehaviourDuringError]
Exceeding min./max. Flow rate [handlingOfFlowRateLimits]
Automatic adaptation of the device characteristic curve [automaticAdoptionOfDeviceCurve]
Automatic adaptation of the design flow rate [automaticAdoptionOfDesignFlowRate]
Automatic adaptation of the controller parameters [automaticAdoptionOfPIDParameter]
Stability range [StabilityRange]
Duration of stability for switching to gravimetric mode [minimumStabilityDurationForGravimetric]
Maximum time with operation error [maxTimeOperatingError]
Maximum waiting time for stability [maxWaitingTimeForStability]
Minimum / Maximum flow rate [minimumFlowRate / maximumFlowRate]
Delay time minimum / maximum flow rate [delayTimeFlowRateLimits]
Gain factor (P), Integration time (I), Differentiator time (D) [gainFactorPid, integrationTimePid, differentiatorTimePid]
Deadzone PID controller [deadzonePID]
Flow rate 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 [deviceCurveFlowRatePoint1, 2, 3, 4, 5] Control value 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 [deviceCurveControlValue1, 2, 3, 4, 5]
Average filter for weight, flow rate [averageFilter1, 2]
Filter level [filterLevel]
DR07 Interface parameters
DQ monitoring [monitoringOfDQ]
Reaction to CPU stop / failure [behaviourOnCPUStopOrFailure]
Trace rate [traceRate]
Load per pulse [loadPerPulsRemoteTotalizer] [pulsDurationRemoteTotalizer] [pauseDurationRemoteTotalizer]
I/O process values 1 to 4 [ioProcessValue1 to ioProcessValue4]
I/O process values 5 to 8 [ioProcessValue5 to ioProcessValue8]
Source for simulation values [simulationSource]
Signal logic DQ.0 to DQ.2 [signalLogicDQ0 bis signalLogicDQ2]
Feeder enabled via user program
Hardware interrupt 1 to 8 [hardwareInterrupt1 to hardwareInterrupt8]
Signal logic hardware interrupt 1 to 8 [alarmLogic1 to alarmLogic8]
Digital output DQ.0 to DQ.2
Substitute value for DQ.0 to DQ.2 on error [substituteValueDQ0 to substituteValueDQ2]
Subnet mask, IP address, gateway, device name
Digital inputs DI.0 to DI.2 [functionDI0 bis functionDI2]
Filtering DI.0 to DI.2
Signal logic DI.0 to DI.3 [signalLogicDI0 bis signalLogicDI2]
DR10 Load cell parameters
Load cell input [loadCellType]
Mains frequency [mainsFrequency]
Mains frequency filter [mainsFrequencyFilterActivated]
4-wire / 6-wire sensor [fourSixWireSensor]
External / internal sensor supply [internalExternalAdcSupply]
No. of mechanical support points [numberOfSupportPoints]
Averaged load cell characteristic value (mV/V) [averagedCharacteristicValue]
Capacity of one single load cell [capacityOfOneSingleLoadCell]
Impedance reference (Ohm) [impedanceReference]
Maximum impedance deviation (% of impedance reference) [maximumAllowedImpedanceDeviation]
Load cell manufacturer [loadCellManufacturer] and load cell order number [loadCellOrderNumber]
DR15
DR15 Configuration of technology messages
DR16 Simulation
Simulation
Weight [weightSimulation]
Design flow rate [designRateSimulation]
Fluctuation of dosing flow [dosingFluctuationSimulation]
Filling flow rate [fillingFlowRateSimulation]
DR20 set point
Set point [setPoint]
DR30 Scale status
Scale status DR30
DR31 Scale status extended
Scale status extended DR31
DR32 Error messages
Error messages DR32
DR33 Totalizers
Totalizer DR33
General Totalizer T1 [generalTotalizerT1]
Totalizer T2 [totalizerT2]
Totalizer T3 [totalizerT3], Totalizer T4 [totalizerT4], Totalizer T5 [totalizerT5]
Totalizer T6 [totalizerT6]
DR34
DR 34 ASCII main display value
Content of main display as ASCII string
DR70 SIWAREX DB parameter
DR 70 SIWAREX DB parameter
DR80, DR81, DR82 SIWAREX DB Process status and device information
DR 80 / DR 81 / DR 82 SIWAREX DB process status and device information
DR156 Security audit log entry
DR156 Security Audit Log Entry
Commands
Service and trace commands
Calibration and scale commands
Loss-in-weight dosing commands
Commissioning
Service and maintenance
Device is maintenance-free
Disposal
Disposal
Special disposal required
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Message and error types
Evaluating errors/messages using the Web server
Evaluating errors/messages using the FB
Operating errors
Operating errors
Technology messages
Data and command errors
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR03
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR05
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR07
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR10, DR11, DR14, DR16, DR17, DR18 and DR28
Add info [errorAddInfo] for DR30
Add info [errorAddInfo] starting DR70
Diagnostic messages
Error codes and corrective measures
Trigger a diagnostic interrupt
Meaning of the LEDs
Hardware interrupts
Technical data
Technical specifications
Certificates and approvals
Product documentation and support
Product documentation
Technical support
SIWAREX support
Ordering data
Accessories
Technology module TM FCT070
Introduction
Use as prescribed (SIWAREX DB)
Purpose of this document
Use in hazardous area
Inner temp. - ambient temp.
Impermissible repair of the device
Security information
Open Source Software
Product overview
View
Properties
Modes and Functions
Overview
Cut-off limits
Zero point adjustment
Digital output mode DQ0/DQ1
Digital output mode DQ0/DQ1
Status signal
Force value
Flow direction
Digital input mode DI0/DI1
Digital input mode DI0/DI1
Function: Dosing
Function Dosing
Filling with one valve
Filling with two valves and external start
Filling with two valves and stop filling procedure
Filling with two valves and interrupt filling procedure
Function: Totalizer
Function Totalizer
Freeze process values
Force outputs
Zero adjust on leading edge
Installation
Basic safety notes for ordinary location (electrical safety FM, UL)
Access restriction due to high housing temperature (> 50-60 °C)
Safety requirements UL 61010-2-201
Specific conditions for use in hazardous locations (ATEX, IECEx, UL)
Incorrect installation
Wandmontage_Ex-Bereich
Protection against transient voltage surges
Do not disconnect the device II
Replacing components III
Restricted area of use - Class I, Division 2, Groups A B C D; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC
Notes for use in hazardous areas according to FM
Replacing components III
Do not disconnect the device II
CONNECTING THE DEVICE UNDER VOLTAGE
Accessible hot surfaces
To prevent injury
Restricted area of use - Class I, Division 2, Groups A B C D; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC
Restricted area of use - Class 1 Zone 2
Mounting on the SIMATIC ET 200SP HF
Installing FCT070 with isolating power supply
EMC-compliant installation
Introduction
Possible effects of interference
Coupling mechanisms
Five basic rules for securing EMC
Connecting
Basic safety notes for ordinary locations (electrtical safety FM, UL)
Safety extra low voltage
Suitable cables for temperatures above 70 °C - cable 50 °C -60 °C (ATEX)
Special conditions for use in hazardous locations (ATEX; IECEx, FM, UL)
CONNECTING THE DEVICE UNDER VOLTAGE
Protection against transient voltage surges
Connection of inputs and outputs
Start-up of FCT070
Configuring
Configuration software
Configuration overview
Address space
TIA portal Device configuration
TIA Portal Device configuration
General information
I/O addresses
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error displays
Error detection and diagnostics
Technical data
General information
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
Address area
Potential separation
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Dimensions and weight
Electrical, EMC and climatic requirements
Ambient conditions
Certificates and approvals
Programming reference
IO data
IO data
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Measuring units
Measuring units
Product documentation and support
Product documentation
Technical support
Ordering data
Accessories
Technology module TM FST070
Introduction
Use as prescribed (SIWAREX DB)
Purpose of this document
Document history
Use in hazardous area
Inner temp. - ambient temp.
Impermissible repair of the device
Security information
Open Source Software
Product overview
View
Properties
Modes and Functions
Overview
Cut-off limits
Zero point adjustment
Digital output mode DQ0/DQ1
Digital output mode DQ0/DQ1
Status signal
Force value
Flow direction
Digital input mode DI0/DI1
Digital input mode DI0/DI1
Function: Totalizer
Function Totalizer
Freeze process values
Force outputs
Zero adjust on leading edge
Compensation values 1 & 2
Installation
Basic safety notes
Access restriction due to high housing temperature (> 50-60 °C)
Safety requirements UL 61010-2-201
Specific conditions for use in hazardous locations
Incorrect installation
Wandmontage_Ex-Bereich
Protection against transient voltage surges
Do not disconnect the device II
Replacing components III
Accessible hot surfaces
To prevent injury
Restricted area of use - Class I, Division 2, Groups A B C D; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC
Restricted area of use - Class 1 Zone 2
Mounting on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
Installing SITRANS TM FST070 with isolating power supply
EMC-compliant installation
Introduction
Possible effects of interference
Coupling mechanisms
Five basic rules for securing EMC
Connection
Basic safety notes
Safety extra low voltage
Suitable cables for temperatures above 70 °C - cable 50 °C -60 °C (ATEX)
Use in hazardous areas
CONNECTING THE DEVICE UNDER VOLTAGE
Protection against transient voltage surges
Connection of inputs and outputs
Start-up of SITRANS TM FST070
Configuring
Configuration software
Configuration overview
Address space
TIA portal Device configuration
TIA Portal Device configuration
General information
I/O addresses
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error displays
Error detection and diagnostics
Technical specifications
General information
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
Address area
Potential separation
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Dimensions and weight
Electrical, EMC and climatic requirements
Ambient conditions
Certificates and approvals
I/O data
Standard I/O data
Hydrocarbon I/O data
Gas I/O data
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Measuring units
Measuring units
Product documentation and support
Product documentation
Technical support
Remote operation
SIMATIC PDM
Overview SIMATIC PDM
Check SIMATIC PDM version
Updating the Electronic Device Description (EDD)
Ordering data
Accessories
Technology module TM ECC 2xPWM ST (6FE1242-6TM10-0BB1)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
Product overview
Properties
Wiring
Terminal assignment and power supply
Connection examples
Configuring/address space
Configuring
Reaction to CPU STOP
Required I/O address space
Parameter
Control and feedback interface
Assignment of the control interface
Assignment of the feedback Interface
Programming
General information
"ECC4100" functions
FC ECC4100 parameters
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error displays
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Device defect
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Technology module TM ECC PL ST (6FE1242-6TM20-0BB1)
Preface
Preface
Cybersecurity information
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Updating the firmware
Control Pilot
Plug Present
Charging communication according to DIN SPEC 70121
Charge communication
Session Setup
Service Discovery
Service and Payment Selection
Contract Authentication
Charge Parameter Discovery
Cable Check
Pre Charge
Power Delivery
Current Demand
Welding Detection
Session Stop
Enhancements relating to ISO 15118 as of FW Version V1.1.0
Introduction to enhancements relating to ISO 15118
Certificate signing request (CSR)
Contract Certificate (CC)
Wiring
Terminal assignment and power supply
Connection examples
Installation instruction
Configuring / Address space
Configuring
Reaction to CPU STOP
Required I/O address space
Parameter
Control and feedback interface
Assignment of the control interface
Assignment of the feedback Interface
System functions used
Programming
General information
"DIN_70121" function block
"DIN_70121" function block
Required memory of the "DIN_70121" function block
Principle of operation of the "DIN_70121" function block
The principle of operation of the DIN_70121 (introduction)
Startup characteristics of the function block
Response to errors
Possible circuitry of a frequency converter
Authentication phase
"Parameter Discovery" phase
Checking safe isolation from supply on the charging cable (External Voltage Check)
Carrying out the Cable Check
Carrying out the voltage equalization of the frequency converter (PreCharge)
Implementation of the PowerDelivery phase (start charging)
Execution of the charge process (Current Demand)
Termination of the charging process
Hardware states
DIN_70121 parameter
DIN_70121 parameter
UDT_Charger_In
UDT_Charger_EvseCfg
UDT_Charger_Values
UDT_Charger_Out
UDT_Charger_Ev
UDT_Charger_Ev_Diagnostics
UDT_Charger_Ev_Limits
UDT_Charger_Setpoints
Function block "ISO_15118"
Function block "ISO_15118"
Required memory of the "ISO_15118" function block
Mode of operation of the "ISO_15118" function block
The mode of operation of the ISO_15118 (Introduction)
"UDT_Charger_In" extensions with regard to FB "DIN_70121"
"UDT_Charger_Out" extensions with regard to FB "DIN_70121"
Payment using external identification (e.g. RFID card reader)
Payment by means of automatic identification (PnC)
Check of the contract of a vehicle (introduction)
Initiation of the CC by the TM ECC PL ST module
Certificate signing request (CSR)
Certificate handling relating to TLS 1.3 encryption (CSR)
Initiation of the CSR by the TM ECC PL ST module
External initiation of the CSR
Cable Check extensions
ISO_15118 Parameter
ISO_15118 Parameter
UDT_Charger_In
UDT_Charger_EvseCfg
UDT_Charger_Values
UDT_Certificate_In
UDT_Charger_Out
UDT_Charger_Ev
UDT_Charger_Ev_Diagnostics
UDT_Charger_Ev_Limits
UDT_Charger_Setpoints
UDT_Certificate_Out
UDT_Certificate_InOut
"Update_PL_ST" function block
"Update_PL_ST" function block
Required memory of the "Update_PL_ST" function block
Principle of operation of the "Update_PL_ST" function block
Principle of operation of the Update_PL_ST function block (introduction)
"Log_PL_ST" function block
"Log_PL_ST" function block introduction
Principle of operation of the "Log_PL_ST" function block
Principle of operation of the "Log_PL_ST" function block (introduction)
Required memory of the "Log_PL_ST" function block
Error messages
Calibration of the power line signal
Introduction and mode of operation
"ECC_Calibration" function block
"ECC_Calibration" function block
Parameter list
Module fault
Error codes
RDREC and WRREC
Calibration Kit TM ECC CCS2
Description
Technical specifications of the Calibration Kit TM ECC CCS2
Alarms / diagnostics alarms
State and error displays
Alarms
Diagnostic messages
Device defect
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Ex modules (intrinsically safe)
Ex-AI 4xTC/2xRTD 2-/3-/4-wire
Security information
Preface
Product overview
Properties of the I/O module Ex-AI 4TC/2RTD 2-/3-/4-wire
2D Matrix code (QR code / EAN code)
Wiring
Ex BaseUnit
Pin assignment of the I/O module Ex-AI 4TC/2RTD 2-/3-/4-wire
Pin assignment
Pin assignment for RTD 2-wire
Pin assignment for RTD 3-wire
Pin assignment for RTD 4-wire
Pin assignment for thermocouple TC
Schematic circuit diagram
Potential group in hazardous areas
Configuring
Configurations of I/O module Ex-AI 4TC/2RTD 2-/3-/4-wire
Notes for configuration using a GSD/GSDML file
Module/channel parameters
Explanation of parameters
Diagnostics Missing supply voltage L+
Diagnostics: Reference junction
Diagnostics: Overflow
Diagnostics: Underflow
Diagnostics: Wire break
Measurement type/measuring range
Temperature coefficient
Temperature unit
Reference junction
Smoothing
Interference frequency suppression
Fixed reference temperature
Conductor resistance
Hardware interrupt high limit 1 / 2
Hardware interrupt low limit 1 / 2
High limit 1/2
Low limit 1 / 2
Potential group
Module-internal Shared Input (MSI)
Measurement types and measuring ranges
Displays and interrupts
Status and fault displays of the I/O module Ex-AI 4TC/2RTD 2-/3-/4-wire
Status and error displays of the I/O module
Diagnostics display of the DIAG LED
Diagnostics display of the MT LED
Diagnostics display of the Channel status/channel fault LED
Diagnostics display of the PWR LED
Interrupts
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Drivers, parameters, diagnostics messages and address space
Concept of the driver and diagnostics blocks
Parameter assignment and structure of the module/channel parameters
Parameter assignment
Parameter assignment and structure of the module and channel parameters
Diagnostic and maintenance messages
Hardware interrupts
Address space
Address space in analog mode
Address space in analog mode AI 4 without QI
Address space in the analog mode AI 4 with QI and optional MSI
Address space in the analog mode AI 4 Real without QI
Address space in the analog mode AI 4 Real with QI
Input range when using PTC resistors
Evaluating the value status
Analog value display
Analog value display
Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges
Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors
Representation of analog values for thermal resistors
Representation of analog values for thermocouples
Ex-AI 2xI 2-wire HART
Security information
Preface
Product overview
Properties of the I/O module Ex-AI 2xI 2-wire HART
2D Matrix code (QR code / EAN code)
Wiring
Ex BaseUnit
Pin assignment of the I/O module Ex-AI 2xI 2-wire HART
Pin assignment
Connection 2-wire
Connection of external handheld device
Schematic circuit diagram
Potential group in hazardous areas
Configuring
Configurations of the I/O module Ex-AI 2xI 2-wire HART
Notes on configuring when using a GSD/GSDML file
Module/channel parameters
Explanation of parameters
Diagnostics Missing supply voltage L+
Measurement type/measuring range
Smoothing
Interference frequency suppression
Failure monitoring (according to NE43)
Short circuit diagnostics
Diagnostics: Overflow
Diagnostics: Underflow
Diagnostics: Wire break
Diagnostics: HART
Number of HART frame repetitions
Hardware interrupt high limit 1 / 2
High limit 1/2
Hardware interrupt low limit 1 / 2
Low limit 1 / 2
Potential group
Module-internal Shared Input (MSI)
HART mapping parameters
Displays and interrupts
Status and fault displays of the I/O module Ex-AI 2xI 2-wire HART
Status and error displays of the I/O module
Diagnostics display of the DIAG LED
Diagnostics display of the MT LED
Diagnostics display of the Channel status/channel fault LED
Diagnostics display of the PWR LED
Interrupts
HART function
Application
Useful information on use
HART
HART protocol
System connection
Useful information about system connection
HART configuration tool
HART signal
HART device status
Communication
Useful information about communication
HART command
Explanation of the HART commands
Universal HART commands
General purpose HART commands
Device-specific HART commands
SHC sequence
Multiplex operation
Tags
Useful information about HART variables
HART variables
Quality code
HART revision
Field devices with HART revision 5 and 6
Field devices with HART revision 7 and higher
multiHART range
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Drivers, parameters, diagnostics messages and address space
Concept of the driver and diagnostics blocks
Parameter assignment and structure of the module/channel parameters
Parameter assignment
Parameter assignment and structure of the module/channel parameters
Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping parameters
Diagnostic and maintenance messages
Hardware interrupts
Address space
Address space in analog mode
Address space in analog mode AI 2 without QI
Address space in analog mode AI 2 + 1 multiHART without QI
Address space in analog mode AI 2 + 4 HART without QI
Address space in analog mode AI 2 + 1 multiHART with QI
Address space in analog mode AI 2 + 4 HART with QI
Address space in analog mode AI 2 with QI and optional MSI
Evaluating the multiHART range
Evaluating HART variables
Evaluating the value status
HART operating data records
HART command interface
HART operating data records
HART job and response data records
HART directory
HART feature data
HART variable data record
HART-specific settings
Analog value display
Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges
Ex-AQ 2xI HART
Security information
Preface
Product overview
Properties of the I/O module Ex-AQ 2xI HART
2D Matrix code (QR code / EAN code)
Wiring
Ex BaseUnit
Pin assignment of the I/O module Ex-AQ 2xI HART
Pin assignment
Connection of an actuator
Connection of external handheld device
Schematic circuit diagram
Potential group in hazardous areas
Configuring
Configurations of the I/O module Ex-AQ 2xI HART
Notes for configuration using a GSD/GSDML file
Module/channel parameters
Explanation of parameters
Diagnostics Missing supply voltage L+
Output types and output ranges
Diagnostics Short-circuit
Diagnostics: Wire break
Diagnostics: Underflow
Diagnostics: Overflow
Diagnostics: HART
Reaction to CPU STOP
Substitute value
Number of HART frame repetitions
Potential group
Module-internal Shared Output (MSO)
HART mapping parameters
Displays and interrupts
Status and fault displays of the I/O module Ex-AQ 2xI HART
Status and error displays of the I/O module
Diagnostics display of the DIAG LED
Diagnostics display of the MT LED
Diagnostics display of the Channel status LED / channel fault LED
Diagnostics display of the PWR LED
Interrupts
HART function
Application
Useful information on use
HART
HART protocol
System connection
Useful information about system connection
HART configuration tool
HART signal
HART device status
Communication
Useful information about communication
HART command
Explanation of the HART commands
Universal HART commands
General purpose HART commands
Device-specific HART commands
SHC sequence
Multiplex operation
Tags
Useful information about HART variables
HART variables
Quality code
HART revision
Field devices with HART revision 5 and 6
Field devices with HART revision 7 and higher
multiHART range
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Drivers, parameters, diagnostics messages and address space
Concept of the driver and diagnostics blocks
Parameter assignment and structure of the module/channel parameters
Parameter assignment
Parameter assignment and structure of the module/channel parameters
Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping parameters
Diagnostic and maintenance messages
Address space
Address space in analog mode
Address space in analog mode AQ 2 without QI
Address space in analog mode AQ 2 + 1 multiHART without QI
Address space in analog mode AQ 2 + 4 HART without QI
Address space in analog mode AQ 2 + 1 multiHART with QI
Address space in analog mode AQ 2 + 4 HART with QI
Address space in analog mode AQ 2 with QI and optional MSO
Evaluating HART variables
Evaluate multiHART range
Evaluating the value status
HART operating data records
HART command interface
HART operating data records
HART job and response data records
HART directory
HART feature data
HART variable data record
HART-specific settings
Analog value display
Representation of analog values in the current output ranges
Ex-DI 4xNAMUR
Security information
Preface
Product overview
Properties of the I/O module Ex-DI 4xNAMUR
2D Matrix code (QR code / EAN code)
Wiring
Ex BaseUnit
Pin assignment of the I/O module Ex-DI 4xNAMUR
Pin assignment for sensors
Pin assignment for NAMUR sensors or IEC 60947-5-6 sensors
Pin assignment for single contact connected with 10 kΩ (mechanical normally open contact)
Pin assignment for single contact, unconnected (mechanical normally open contact with single contact)
Schematic circuit diagram
Potential group in hazardous areas
Configuring
Configurations of the I/O module Ex-DI 4xNAMUR
Notes for configuration using a GSD/GSDML file
Module/channel parameters in digital mode
Module/channel parameter in digital mode with counter/frequency measurement modes
Explanation of parameters
Diagnostics Missing supply voltage L+
Diagnostics: Short-circuit
Diagnostics: Wire break
Diagnostics: Flutter error
Sensor type
Pulse stretching
Digital input
Flutter monitoring
Monitoring window
Hardware interrupt rising edge
Hardware interrupt falling edge
Operating mode
Edge selection
Reaction to violation of a count high limit
Set output DQ
Hardware interrupt comparison result DQ
Comparison value
Count high limit
Counting range
Potential group
Flutter monitoring function
Module-internal Shared Input (MSI)
"Counter" and "Frequency measurement" operating modes
"Counter" and "Frequency measurement" introduction
Counters
Counting
Gate control
Count operation (startup and stop)
Reaction to violation of a count high limit
Status bit STS_DQ
Loading the count value
Frequency measurement
Displays and interrupts
Status and error displays of the I/O module Ex-DI 4xNAMUR
Status and error displays of the I/O module
Diagnostics display of the DIAG LED
Diagnostics display of the MT LED
Diagnostics display of the Channel status/channel fault LED
Diagnostics display of the PWR LED
Interrupts
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Drivers, parameters, diagnostics messages and address space
Concept of the driver and diagnostics blocks
Parameter assignment and structure of the module and channel parameters
Parameter assignment
Parameter assignment and structure of the module and channel parameters
Configuration-dependent length of the data record 128.
Data record 128 with configuration digital mode
Data record 128 with configuration digital mode with counter/frequency measurement modes
Diagnostic and maintenance messages
Hardware interrupts
Address space
Address space in digital mode DI without QI
Address space in digital mode DI with QI (also with MSI)
Address space in digital mode with counter/frequency measurement modes without QI
Address space in digital mode with counter/frequency measurement modes with QI
Evaluating the value status
Ex-DQ 2x17.4VDC/27mA
Security information
Preface
Product overview
Properties of Ex-DQ 2x17.4VDC/27mA I/O module
2D Matrix code (QR code / EAN code)
Wiring
Ex BaseUnit
Pin assignment of the Ex-DQ 2x17.4VDC/27mA I/O module
Pin assignment for actuators - 2-wire
Schematic circuit diagram
Potential group in hazardous areas
Configuring
Configurations of the I/O module Ex-DQ 2x17.4VDC/27mA
Notes for configuration using a GSD/GSDML file
Module/channel parameters
Explanation of parameters
Diagnostics Missing supply voltage L+
Parallel connection of channels
Diagnostics: Short-circuit
Wire break check
Diagnostics: Wire break
Channel activated
Reaction to CPU STOP
Substitute value
Potential group
Module-internal Shared Output (MSO)
Displays and interrupts
Status and error displays of the Ex-DQ 2x17.4VDC/27mA I/O module
Status and error displays of the I/O module
Diagnostics display of the DIAG LED
Diagnostics display of the MT LED
Diagnostics display of the Channel status/channel fault LED
Diagnostics display of the PWR LED
Interrupts
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Drivers, parameters, diagnostics messages and address space
Concept of the driver and diagnostics blocks
Parameter assignment and structure of the module/channel parameters
Parameter assignment
Parameter assignment and structure of the module and channel parameters
Diagnostic and maintenance messages
Address space
Address space in digital mode
Address space in digital mode with value status
Address space with MSO
Evaluating the value status
Ex-DQ 2x23.1VDC/20mA
Security information
Preface
Product overview
Properties of the I/O module Ex-DQ 2x23.1VDC/20mA
2D Matrix code (QR code / EAN code)
Wiring
Ex BaseUnit
Pin assignment of the I/O module Ex-DQ 2x23.1VDC/20mA
Pin assignment for actuators - 2-wire
Schematic circuit diagram
Potential group in hazardous areas
Configuring
Configurations of the I/O module Ex-DQ 2x23.VDC/20mA
Notes for configuration using a GSD/GSDML file
Module/channel parameters
Explanation of parameters
Diagnostics Missing supply voltage L+
Diagnostics: Short-circuit
Wire break check
Diagnostics: Wire break
Channel activated
Reaction to CPU STOP
Substitute value
Potential group
Module-internal Shared Output (MSO)
Displays and interrupts
Status and error displays of the Ex-DQ 2x23.1VDC/20mA I/O module
Status and error displays of the I/O module
Diagnostics display of the DIAG LED
Diagnostics display of the MT LED
Diagnostics display of the Channel status/channel fault LED
Diagnostics display of the PWR LED
Interrupts
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Drivers, parameters, diagnostics messages and address space
Concept of the driver and diagnostics blocks
Parameter assignment and structure of the module/channel parameters
Parameter assignment
Parameter assignment and structure of the module/channel parameters
Diagnostic and maintenance messages
Address space
Address space in digital mode
Address space in digital mode with value status
Address space with MSO
Evaluating the value status
Communications modules
Communication module CM DP (6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Operating and display elements
Wiring
Pin assignment
Block diagram
Programming
Programming
Diagnostics, error and system alarms
Status and error displays
DP slave diagnostics
Standard diagnostics
Device-specific diagnostics with DP-V1
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Dimension drawing
Dimension drawing of the CM DP communication module
CM PtP communications module (6ES7137-6AA01-0BA0)
Preface
Preface
Siemens Industry Online Support
Industry Mall
Security information
Open Source Software
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Functions
Properties of the interfaces
Properties of the interfaces
Properties of the RS232 interface
Properties of the RS422/485 interface
Connecting
Introduction
RS232 interface of the communications module
RS422/485 interface of the communications module
Installation guidelines
Parameters/address space
Configuring
Reaction to CPU STOP
Parameter setting
Address space
Programming
Programming
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error displays
Diagnostic alarms
Trigger a diagnostic interrupt
Explanation of diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
SIMATIC CP 154xSP-1
Preface
Preface
Lizenzbedingungen Open Source - Text (2015 - nur 1 Dok.)
Lizenzbedingungen Open Source - 2. Dok. CP 154xSP-1
Cybersecurity information
See also
Firmware
Firmware/software support
Device defective
Decommissioning
Außerbetriebnahme - Rücksetzen CPU -
Recycling and disposal - 1 device with pictogram
Note on the SIMATIC NET glossary - DVD + Internet
Training, Service & Support (Hinweis auf Internet)
Application and functions
Components of the product
Application
Communications services
PUT/GET: Restrictions in the CPU
Telecontrol communication (CP 1542SP-1 IRC)
Communication via SINEMA RC (CP 1542SP‑1 IRC, CP 1543SP‑1)
- Gültigkeit SINEMA Remote Connect -
Communication via SINEMA RC
Security functions (CP 1542SP‑1 IRC, CP 1543SP‑1)
Other services and properties
Configuration limits and performance data
Requirements for use
Hardware requirements
Software requirements
Configuration examples
Remote maintenance with SINEMA RC
LEDs and connectors
LEDs
Power supply
Connector for the BusAdapter
Installation, wiring, commissioning
Important notes on using the device
Preface to Notes / start "Installation and connection"
Warning overvoltage protection
Notes on use in hazardous areas
Degree of pollution (IEC 60664-1)
explosion hazard - disconnecting the device from live cables/wires (UL-HazLoc)
Notes on use in hazardous areas according to ATEX / UKEX / IECEx / CCC-Ex
Anforderungen an den Schaltschrank EN 60529 (ATEX...CCC-Ex) - neue CPUs
Requirements for cables and cable entries EN IEC 60079-0 / GB 3836.1 (ATEX/IECEx)
Protection against transient overvoltages (maximum value)
Notes on use in hazardous areas according to UL HazLoc and FM
Restricted area of use - Class I, Division 2, Groups A B C D
Restricted area of use - Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC
Replacing components
Cabinet installation
Inner temp. - ambient temp.
FM - installed within an ultimate enclosure
Installation, removal and repairs in hazardous areas
Impermissible accessories and spare parts
Unsuitable cables or connectors
Improper installation of shielded cables
Lack of equipotential bonding
Unprotected cable ends
Insufficient isolation of intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe circuits
Impermissible repair of devices
Installing, connecting and commissioning
Improper mounting
Offene Betriebsmittel - UL 61010-2-201
Installing the CP
Safety-extra low voltage + redundant power supply / without NEC
Connecting the CP
Commissioning the CP
Setting the time of day during commissioning
Set time for operation with Security / SINEMA RC
Disassembly
Uninstalling
Configuration
Security recommendations
Configuration in STEP 7
Communication types (CP 1543SP-1)
Ethernet interface
Configuration and notes on operation
IPv6
Advanced options
Access to the Web server
Web server access - Info ET 200SP
Time-of-day synchronization
DNS configuration
Communication with the CPU
Communication with the CPU
CP diagnostics
SNMP
Security (CP 1543SP-1)
Sec. CP 1542SP-1 IRC) - - - Verweis
Vorspann - Security CP 1543SP-1
Security user
Firewall
Pre-check of messages by the MAC firewall.
Settings for online security diagnostics and downloading to station with the firewall activated
Notation for the source IP address (advanced firewall mode)
Firewall settings for S7 connections via a VPN tunnel
Log settings - Filtering of the system events
E-mail configuration
VPN
VPN (Virtual Private Network)
SINEMA Remote Connect
Creating a VPN tunnel for S7 communication between stations
VPN communication with SOFTNET Security Client (engineering station)
Establishment of VPN tunnel communication between the CP and SCALANCE M
CP as passive subscriber of VPN connections
SNMP
Certificate manager
Tabelle "Zertifikatsmanager" - Add. 2 (Security-CP)
Messages: E-mails (CP 1542SP-1 IRC / CP 1543SP-1)
Character set for e-mail server and messages (CP 1543SP-1)
Program blocks
Program blocks for OUC
Changing the IP parameters during runtime
MODBUS blocks
Diagnostics and maintenance
Risk of burns during maintenance work
Reinigung - Ex / Nicht-Ex
Diagnostics options
Online security diagnostics via port 8448 (CP 1542SP-1 IRC, CP 1543SP-1)
Link Online-Diagnose Port 8448
Diagnostics with SNMP
Web server of the CPU
Processing status of e-mails (CP 1543SP-1)
Downloading firmware
Module replacement
Technical specifications
Technical specifications of the CP 154xSP-1
Ambient temperature
Approvals
Note - products in general without shipbuilding approvals
Approvals bus adapter - note
Approvals ET200SP-CP
EAC
MSIP (KC)
Current approvals
Dimension drawings
Dimension drawing
Accessories
BusAdapter
Assignment of the Ethernet interface of the bus adapter
IP-based routers
Encryption methods (Ciphers)
Encryption methods (Ciphers) used by the CP
Documentation references
Aufbau der Dokumentation - - Hinweis im Literaturverzeichnis
Introduction to the documentation
/1/ CP 1542SP‑1, CP 1542SP‑1 IRC, CP 1543SP‑1
/2/ ET 200SP system manual
/3/ ET 200SP Manual Collection
/4/ TeleControl Server Basic
/5/ TIM DNP3
/6/ SNMP
/7/ Industrial Ethernet system manual
/8/ SINEMA Remote Connect ‑ Server
/9/ SINAUT ST7 system manual
/10/ TeleControl configuration manuals
Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Functions
Replacement of the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link communication module with an electronic coding element type H
Time-based IO
Reset communication module to factory settings
Connecting
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Declaration of parameters
Address space
Diagnostic alarms
Status and error displays
Diagnostic alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Parameter data record
Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data set
AS-Interface master CM AS-i Master ST (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1)
Siemens Industry Support
Documentation guide
Siemens Industry Online Support
Siemens Industry Online Support app
Support Request
Safety instructions
Safety instructions
Security information
Description
Characteristics of the CM AS-i Master ST
Operating modes of the CM AS-i Master ST
Firmware update
Connecting
Terminal assignment
Schematic circuit diagram
Configuring
Requirements
Basic configuration of the CM AS-i Master ST
Configuration of the AS‑i slaves
Configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7
Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the "SET" button
Configuration of the AS-i slaves via the control panel in the TIA Portal
Configuration of the AS-i slaves using the PLC program
Online functions in the TIA Portal
Note
Switching from one operating mode to another
Applying the slave configuration
Setting the address of an AS-i slave
Variable configuration
Introduction
Option handling
Option handling
DS 131 Activate/deactivate optional slaves
DS 131 Read status of option handling
AS-i proxy slave
Parameter assignment/addressing
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
Address space
Data exchange between the user program and AS-i slaves
Access to AS-Interface
Transmitting AS-i digital values
Transmitting AS-i digital values
I/O addresses when configuring AS-i slaves in STEP 7
I/O addresses without configuration of the AS-i slaves in STEP 7
Special characteristics of AS-i Safety slaves
Transferring AS-i analog values and transparent/digital values more than 4 bits in length
AS-i analog values and transparent / digital values more than 4 bits in length are transferred
Accessing AS-i analog data via the process image
Accessing AS-i analog data via acyclic services
Alarms, faults and system events
Overview
Diagnostics in STEP 7
LED statuses
Arrangement of the LEDs on the CM AS‑i Master ST
Meaning of the LEDs
Diagnostic messages
Alarms
Possible response to the diagnostic interrupt
Error messages
Replacing a defective AS-i slave / automatic address programming
Duplicate address detection
Diagnosis via the web server
Fault indications/fault remedies
Data records for diagnostics
DS 92 Diagnostic data record (FW V1.1 and higher)
DS 96 Read AS-i master error counters and status messages (FW V1.1 and higher)
DS 97 Read and reset AS-i master error counters (FW V1.1 and higher)
DS 150 to DS 153 Read AS-i error counters
DS 150 to DS 153 Read AS-i slave error counters
DS 150 Read AS-i slave error counters 1/1A to 16/16A
DS 151 Read AS-i slave error counters 16/16A to 31/31A
DS 152 Read AS-i slave error counters 1B to 16B
DS 153 Read AS-i slave error counters 16B to 31B
DS 154 Delete AS-i error counters (from FW V1.1)
Using the command interface
Introduction
Command interface with SIMATIC S7
Command interface with controllers of other manufacturers
Description of the AS-i commands
Command from user program to the CM AS-i Master ST
No. 00: Set_Permanent_Parameter
No. 01: GET_Permanent_Parameter
No. 02: Write_Parameter
No. 03: Read_Parameter
No. 04: Store_Actual_Parameters
No. A5: Set_Permanent_Configuration
No. A6: Get_Permanent_Configuration
No. 07: Store_Actual_Configuration
No. A8: Read_Actual_Configuration
No. A9: Set_LPS
No. 0A: SET_Offline_Mode
No. 0B: Set_Auto_Address_Enable
No. 0C: Set_Operation_Mode
No. 0D: Change_AS-i-Slave_Address
No. 0F: Read_Status
No. B0: Get_LPS, Get_LAS, Get_LDS, Get_Flags
No. B9: Read_overall_configuration
No. BA: Write_overall_configuration
No. 3C: Set_PI
No. 33: AS-i Parameter Echolist
No. 44: Read_Write_CTT2_String
No. 14: Read_Version
No. 17: Read ID_Code
No. 37: Read_ID1-Code
No. 3F: Write ID1-Code
No. 38: Read_ID2-Code
No. 18: Read_IO-Code
No. BE: Get_LPF
No. 40: Write_Parameter_String
No. 41: Read_String
No. 42: Read_String
No. 43: Read_String
No. CA: Read_Error_Counter
No. CB: Read_and_Delete_AS-i-Master_Error_Counter
No. CC: Read_AS-i_error_counter
No. CD: Read_and_delete_AS-i_Slave_error_counter
No. 13: Activate_ground fault detection (reset EFD)
No. D0: Set_Configuration_Online
No. D1: AS-i-Slave_ID1_schreiben_mit_Zieladresse (Write ID1 code with destination address)
Technical data
Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support
AS-Interface Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements
AS-Interface Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS)
Readme Open Source Software
Read_me OSS
Data sets
DS 100 Switch duplicate address detection on/off
DS 100 Read setting for duplicate address detection
DS 101 Read version identifier
Approvals
Introduction
Ex certificates
List of abbreviations
List of abbreviations
Communication Module CAN (6ES7137-6EA00-0BA0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Open Source Software
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
New properties/functions
Version overview
Changes compared to previous version
Product overview
Properties
System requirements
Design
Functions
CANopen
Basic functions
Overview
Object Dictionary
Process data objects (PDO)
Service Data Objects (SDO)
EMCY messages
Heartbeat / Node Guarding
SYNC messages
Data exchange between the SIMATIC S7 controller and the module
Conversion from data formats between SIMATIC S7 controller and CANopen
CANopen manager
Overview
CANopen manager - State Model
CANopen manager - Control and Status Information
Acyclic data exchange between the SIMATIC S7- controller and the module
CANopen manager - Monitoring Functions
CANopen slave
Overview
CANopen slave - Object Dictionary
CANopen slave - State Model
CANopen slave - Control and Status Information
CANopen slave - Monitoring Functions
Response to error
CAN transparent
Overview
CAN transparent - state model
CAN transparent - CAN messages
CAN transparent - control and status information
Cyclical data exchange between the SIMATIC S7 controller and the module with configured CAN messages
Cyclical data exchange between the SIMATIC S7 controller and the module with programmed CAN messages (proxy)
CAN transparent - Reaction to fault
Connecting
Wiring
Address space
Address space
Parameter assignment
Overview
Configuring CANopen manager
Overview
Configuration in the TIA Portal
Configuring CANopen slave
Overview
Configuration in the TIA Portal
Configuring CAN transparent
Overview
Configuration in the TIA Portal
Programming
PLC tags
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Advanced diagnostics alarms
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
ET 200SP CM 1xDALI Communication Model Description
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
CM 1xDALI communication model
Configuring the CM 1xDALI
Structure of CM command/response
Sending/receiving CM commands
CM 1xDALI command list
Overview
System
System
Poll the status and event of CM 1xDALI
Send DALI command
Reset module status
Control gear dimming
Overview
Query level
Set level
Query control gear color
Set control gear color
Go to control gear scene
Diagnostic
Overview
Query control gear status
Check control gears status
Query control gear operating hours
Set control gear operating hours
Query input device status
Check input device status
Query instance input value of the input device
Query device GTIN
Configuration
Overview
Add control gear
Remove control gear
Query control gear basic parameters
Set control gear basic parameters
Query control gear extended parameters
Type-related parameters for control gear types
Set control gear extended parameters
Query control gear groups
Add control gear to groups
Remove control gear from groups
Query control gear scene
Set control gear scene
Remove control gear scene
Start download control gear parameters
Start upload control gear parameters
Add input device
Remove input device
Query input device parameters
Set input device parameters
Query instance parameters of input device
Type-related parameters for input device
Set instance parameters of input device
Start download input device parameters
Start upload input device parameters
Reset Device
Addressing
Overview
Start scan and assign short address
Start identify device
Detect unaddressed device
Query address status
Change short address
Progress
Overview
Query current command progress
Cancel current command
Return code and control status
Return code
Address status
Description of status
Fail-safe modules
Fail-safe inputs
Digital input module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA01-0CA0)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP documentation guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
S7 Failsafe Configuration Tool (S7-FCT)
S7 Failsafe Configuration Tool (S7-FCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Product overview
Properties
Operating modes
Digital inputs operating mode
Wiring
Pin assignment for "Digital inputs" operating mode
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Module parameters
Operating mode
F-parameters
F-parameters
Behavior after channel fault
Reintegration after channel fault
Parameters of the sensor supply
Short-circuit test
Time for short-circuit test
Startup time of sensor after short-circuit test
Parameters of the channel pairs
Sensor evaluation
Discrepancy behavior
Discrepancy time
Reintegration after discrepancy error
Parameters of the channels
Activated
Channel failure acknowledge
Sensor supply
Input delay
Chatter monitoring
Number of signal changes
Monitoring window
Address space
Applications for inputs
Applications for inputs
Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd
Application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLe
Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe
Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe
Application 3.1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe
Application 3.2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe
Safety mat evaluation application (from firmware version V2.0.0)
Counter operating mode
Wiring
Pin assignment “Counter" operating mode
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Counter
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Module parameters
Operating mode
F-parameters
F-parameters
Behavior after channel fault
Reintegration after channel fault
Counter parameters
Input delay
Reset when counting limit is violated
Reaction to violation of a counting limit
Discrepancy limit [number of pulses]
Discrepancy time limit
High counting limit
Low counting limit
Start value
Counting value change reported
Channel failure acknowledge
Parameters for gate, reset and direction control
Parameters for gate, reset and direction hardware control
Address space
Assignment of the control interface counter
Assignment of the feedback interface counter
Use cases for Counter (as of firmware version V3.0.0)
Application examples for counter mode
Standstill and Overspeed monitoring operating mode
Wiring
Pin assignment "Standstill and Overspeed monitoring" operating mode
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Standstill and overspeed monitoring
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
Module parameters
Operating mode
F-parameters
F-parameters
Behavior after channel fault
Reintegration after channel fault
Standstill and overspeed monitoring parameters
Input delay
Channel failure acknowledge
Monitoring window duration
Overspeed threshold
Overspeed off-delay [number of monitoring windows]
Standstill threshold
Standstill on-delay [number of monitoring windows]
Tolerant discrepancy evaluation method during standstill
Parameters for gate and reset control
Parameters for gate hardware control
Address space
Assignment of the standstill and overspeed monitoring control interface
Assignment of the standstill and overspeed monitoring feedback interface
Standstill and overspeed monitoring use cases (as of firmware version V3.0.0)
Standstill and overspeed monitoring use case
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostic messages
Value status
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Response times
Response times
Analog input module F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1)
Preface
Preface
Important note for maintaining the operational safety of your system
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Connecting
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Measurement types and measuring ranges
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
F-parameters
F-parameters
Parameters of the channels
Interference frequency suppression
Evaluation of the sensors
Standard value
Discrepancy time
Tolerance window %, absolute
Tolerance window %, relative
Parameter assignment of discrepancy analysis for 1oo2 evaluation
Activated
Channel failure acknowledge
Measuring range
Diagnostics: Wire break
Smoothing
Address space
Applications of the F-I/O module
Applications of the F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF
Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd with 2-wire transducer
Application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with 2-wire transducer
Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd with 4-wire transducer
Application 4: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with 4-wire transducer
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostic messages
Value status
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Response times
Response times
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values
Analog input module F-AI 4xU 0..10V HF (6ES7136-6AB00-0CA1)
Preface
Preface
Important note for maintaining the operational safety of your system
Security information
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Product overview
Properties
Connecting
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Measurement types and measuring ranges
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
F-parameters
F-parameters
Parameters of the channels
Interference frequency suppression
Sensor evaluation
Standard value
Discrepancy time
Tolerance window %, absolute
Tolerance window %, relative
Discrepancy analysis with 1oo2 evaluation
Activated
Channel failure acknowledge
Measuring range
Diagnostics: Wire break
Smoothing
Address space
Applications of the F-I/O module
Applications of the F-AI 4xU HF
Application 1: Safety mode SIL2/Cat.3/PLd with two-wire connection, 1oo1 evaluation
Application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with two-wire connection, 1oo2 evaluation
Application 3: Safety mode SIL2/Cat.3/PLd with four-wire connection, 1oo1 evaluation
Application 4: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe with four-wire connection, 1oo2 evaluation
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostic messages
Value status
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Response times
Response times
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values
Representation of analog values
Fail-safe outputs
Digital Output Module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB01-0CA0)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
S7 Failsafe Configuration Tool (S7-FCT)
S7 Failsafe Configuration Tool (S7-FCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Product overview
Properties
Connecting
Wiring and schematic circuit diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
F-parameters
PROFIsafe address
Behavior after channel fault
Reintegration after channel fault
DQ parameters
Maximal test period
Behavior at loss of communication
Reaction of the output module with the "Keep last valid value" setting
Disable Dark Test (max. SIL2, CAT3, PLd)
Disable Dark Test for 48 hours
Enable Dynamic Read Back
Parameters of the channels
Activated
Max. readback time, dark test and switch-off test
Max. readback time switch on test
Channel failure acknowledge
Activated light test
Diagnosis: Wire break
Address space
Applications of the F-I/O module
Applications of the F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF
Application: Wiring a load to each digital output
Application: Connection of loads to L+ and M at each digital output
Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to each digital output
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostic messages
Value status
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Response times
Response times
Switching of loads
Connecting capacitive loads
Switching of inductive loads
Digital output module F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0)
Preface
Preface
Important note for maintaining the operational safety of your system
Security information
ET 200SP documentation guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
S7 Failsafe Configuration Tool (S7-FCT)
S7 Failsafe Configuration Tool (S7-FCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Product overview
Properties
Connecting
Wiring and block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
F-parameters
F-parameters
Behavior after channel fault
Reintegration after channel fault
Parameters of the channels
Maximum test period
Disable dark test for 48 hours
Activated
Max. readback time dark test
Max. readback time light test
Activated light test
Channel failure acknowledge
Address space
Applications of the F-I/O module
Use cases of the F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF
Installation of the ground line between the power supply and the BaseUnit
Application: Wiring a load to each digital output
Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to each digital output
Application: Two-channel actuator connection via 2 digital outputs
Application: Connection of a fail-safe digital input to each digital output
Application: Connection of the ET 200SP digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0)
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Value status
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Response times
Response times
Switching of loads
Connecting capacitive loads
Switching of inductive loads
Digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Guide to the documentation
Guide to the documentation for the digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A
Product overview
Properties of the F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A
Connecting up
Terminal assignment
Block diagram
Addressing
Address space
Applications of the F-I/O module
Applications of the F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A
Application 1: 2 loads, single-pole switch-off
Application 2: 1 load, single-pole switch-off
Application 3: 1 load, two-pole switch-off with 1 F-RQ module
Application 4: 1 load, two-pole switch-off with 2 F-RQ modules
Application 5: 2 loads, single-pole switch-off with 2 F-RQ modules
Status and error display
Status and error display
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions
Switching capacity and service life of contacts
Response times
Response times
Fail-safe communications modules (F-CM)
Fail-safe Module F-CM AS-i Safety ST (3RK7136-6SC00-0BC1)
Preface
Preface
Documentation guide
Safety instructions
Product overview
Properties of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST
Operating modes of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST
Standard mode
Error statuses
Error statuses
Serious device fault
Device fault
Process signal error
Parameter assignment error
Firmware update
Connection
Terminal assignment
Schematic circuit diagram
Configuring
Configuring the F-CM AS‑i Safety ST
Safety-related communication with AS-Interface
Operating principle of code sequences of safe AS-i slaves
Operating principle of the safe AS-i outputs
AS-i bus configuration with multiple F-CM AS-i Safety ST modules
Configuring with STEP 7 (classic)
Configuring with the TIA Portal
Assigning parameters / Setting the address space
Parameters
Explanation of the parameters
F-parameters
Potential group / AS-i network
Module parameters - General
Module parameters - Safe inputs
Module parameters - Safe outputs
Address space
Address assignment for user data and value status of the F-CM AS-i Safety ST module
Value status
Data records for diagnostics
Data records for diagnostics
DS 92 Device-specific diagnostics
DS 202 Status safe inputs/outputs
DS 204 Status code sequences
DS 206 Diagnostic data record
Code sequences
Managing code sequences
Transferring code sequences via STEP 7 online access
Transferring code sequences via STEP 7 online access
"Teach ASIsafe code sequences" dialog
Transferring taught code sequences
"Progress of teaching operation" display
Transferring code sequences with the "TEACH" button.
Transferring code sequences with the "TEACH" button.
Final steps
Reintegrating passivated input channels
Alarm, fault, and system events
Overview
LED statuses
Arrangement of the LEDs on the F-CM AS-i Safety ST
Meaning of the LEDs
Diagnostic messages
Replacement of defective devices
Replacing a safe AS-i input slave
Replacing the safe AS-i output module (evaluation unit)
Replacing the F‑CM AS‑i Safety ST module
Technical specifications
Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support
Configuration software
Safe technical specifications
Response times
Calculation of monitoring times and response times
List of abbreviations
List of abbreviations
References
References
Fail-safe technology modules (F-TM)
ET 200SP F-TM Count 1x1Vpp sin/cos HF (6ES7136-6CB00-0CA0)
Preface
Security information
Preface
Documentation guide
ET 200SP Documentation guide
Product overview
Properties
Functions
Safety
Detection of counting signals
Measured value determination
Counter control and feedback
Counter input diagnostics
Connecting
Wiring and block diagram
Requirements for the Encoder
Parameters/address space
Configuring the F-TM Count module
Overview
Using STEP 7 (TIA Portal V17 or greater)
Using STEP 7 (TIA Portal) with GSDML (versions of TIA Portal prior to V17)
Reinitialize on parameterization download
Reaction to CPU STOP
Reactions to counting limit violation
Parameters of the F-TM Count
Explanation of parameters
F-parameters
TM-C parameters
Behavior at the counting limits
Quadrature evaluation of differential signals
Safety functions
Overview
Safe Operating Stop (SOS)
Overview
Function of SOS
Example using SOS monitoring
Configuring SOS
Enabling SOS
Responding to SOS
Safety Limited Speed (SLS)
Overview
Function of Safety Limited Speed (SLS)
Configuring SLS
Enabling SLS
Responding to SLS
Safe Direction (SDI)
Overview
Function of Safe Direction (SDI)
Configuring SDI
Responding to SDI
Address space
Control and feedback interface
Assignment of the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Applications of the F-I/O module
Application mode 1: A/B with N
Application mode 2: A/B without N
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Reactions to faults
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostic messages
Value status (CQ HSC0)
Technical specifications
Specifications
Response times
Maximum response time of the system
Response times of the F-TM Count module
Parameter data record
Parameter defaults and dependencies when configuring with GSD file
PLC data types
PLC data types for F-TM Count
F-TM ServoDrive ST 1x24V..48V
Introduction
About SIMATIC Micro-Drive
About SIMATIC MICRO-DRIVE
About this information for use
Contents
Sales law
Contents
Keeping the documentation safe
Information regarding third-party products
Target group
Standard scope
Use of third-party products in this documentation
Websites of third-party companies
SIMATIC documentation
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Service & Support
FAQ
ID link and Siemens Online Support
Spare parts services
Important product information
Intended use
Safety Evaluation Tool (SET)
Fundamental safety instructions
General safety instructions
Electric shock and danger to life due to other energy sources
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively high impedance
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively low impedance
Electric shock if there is no ground connection
Electric shock due to connection to an unsuitable power supply
Electric shock due to equipment damage
Electric shock due to unconnected cable shield
Arcing when a plug connection is opened during operation
Material damage caused by an incorrect power connection
Electromagnetic interference due to inadequate shield support
Active implant malfunctions due to electromagnetic fields
Symptomatic respiratory and skin reaction to chemicals
Unexpected machine movements caused by radio waves
Radio frequency interference in residential areas
EMC emission limits when connected to an isolated power system
Fire due to inadequate ventilation clearances
Overheating due to inadmissible mounting position
Device damage caused by incorrect insulation resistance tests
Device damage caused by incorrect voltage tests
Unexpected movement of machines caused by inactive safety functions
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Warranty and liability for application examples
Cybersecurity information
Industrial cybersecurity
Residual risks of power drive systems
Product overview
Area of application
Properties
Supported functions
Wiring
Pin assignment
Block diagram
Wiring of multiple F-TM ServoDrive
Connecting the motor
Connecting an encoder
Connecting an incremental encoders
Connecting IQ-Encoders
Connecting safe torque off (Hardware STO)
Connecting the 24 V digital input
Connecting an external braking resistor
Safety functions integrated in the drive
Basic safety information
General safety information
Danger to life if the safety instructions are not taken into consideration
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
Safety function for ambient conditions
Warranty and liability for application examples
Fundamental safety instructions for Safety Integrated
Safety information_FH1_FHS
Safety Integrated functions
Safety Integrated functions
Safe Torque Off (STO)
Overview of the Safety Integrated functions
Supported safety functions
Examples of using the safety functions
Safety concept
Acceptance of the safety functions
Responsibilities
General information on acceptance
Content of an acceptance test
Documentation of acceptance
Acceptance test for Safe Torque Off (STO)
Report completion
System features
Current information
Certifications
Failure probability of the safety functions
Response times
Safety Integrated
EMERGENCY OFF and EMERGENCY STOP
Configuring
Requirements
Communication telegrams
Structure of the encoder position actual value
Layout of the actual encoder position value
Incremental encoder
IQ encoder
Commissioning the
Overview
Basics
Engineering
Drive parameters
Loading drive parameters
Calling help information
Requirements for the commissioning
Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP TM Drive
Drive data sets
Content of drive data sets
Using the drive data set
Using preconfigured drive data sets
Drive data export / import
Using a user-defined drive data set
PMSM drive parameters
Motor encoder
Motor encoder
Encoder parameters incremental encoder and IQ encoder
Assign encoder counting direction parameters
Setting the commutation angle offset and pole position identification
Calibration process of the commutation angle offset
Automatic encoder / pole position identification
Setpoint channel
Setpoint channel - Introduction
Reference values
Application limits
Ramp-function generator and speed setpoint filter
Controller settings
Controller settings
Speed control (cascade)
Automatic controlled system detection
Manual controller tuning Speed controller (cascade)
OFF responses
DC-link voltage
Brake module
Brake module
Brake chopper
External motor holding brake
Messages/monitoring
Messages and monitors
Motor
Braking resistor
Power end stage
Dynamic torque reduction
Programming
Introduction_new
Controlling TM Drive via the process image
Controlling a TM Drive via the instruction SINA_SPEED
Controlling TM Drive with a technology object
Maintenance
Firmware update
Stop responses
Interrupts, error messages and diagnostics and system alarms
Status and error displays
Diagnostics
Diagnostics overview of the F-TM ServoDrive
Active messages
Drive diagnostics
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Derating of the ET 200SP TM Drive
Appendix
Response times
Braking resistor and brake chopper power
Data sets
Device disposal
Device disposal and data security
Directives and standards
Directives and standards
UKCA marking
China RoHS
F-TM ServoDrive HF 1x24..48V 5A
Introduction
About SIMATIC Micro-Drive
About SIMATIC MICRO-DRIVE
About this information for use
Contents
Sales law
Contents
Keeping the documentation safe
Information regarding third-party products
Target group
Standard scope
Use of third-party products in this documentation
Websites of third-party companies
SIMATIC documentation
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Service & Support
ID link and Siemens Online Support
Spare parts services
FAQ
Important product information
Intended use
Safety Evaluation Tool (SET)
Fundamental safety instructions
General safety instructions
Electric shock and danger to life due to other energy sources
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively high impedance
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively low impedance
Electric shock if there is no ground connection
Electric shock due to connection to an unsuitable power supply
Electric shock due to equipment damage
Electric shock due to unconnected cable shield
Arcing when a plug connection is opened during operation
Material damage caused by an incorrect power connection
Electromagnetic interference due to inadequate shield support
Active implant malfunctions due to electromagnetic fields
Symptomatic respiratory and skin reaction to chemicals
Unexpected machine movements caused by radio waves
Radio frequency interference in residential areas
EMC emission limits when connected to an isolated power system
Fire due to inadequate ventilation clearances
Overheating due to inadmissible mounting position
Device damage caused by incorrect insulation resistance tests
Device damage caused by incorrect voltage tests
Unexpected movement of machines caused by inactive safety functions
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Warranty and liability for application examples
Cybersecurity information
Industrial cybersecurity
Residual risks of power drive systems
Product overview
Area of application
Properties
Supported functions
Wiring
Pin assignment
Block diagram
Wiring of multiple TM Drive
Connecting the motor
Connecting the motor
Connecting the motor phases (PMSM)
Wiring the motor phases (stepper motor)
Connecting an encoder
Connecting an incremental encoders
Connecting IQ-Encoders
Connecting a BiSS-C encoder
Connecting safe torque off (Hardware STO)
Connecting the 24 V digital input
Connecting an external braking resistor
Safety functions integrated in the drive
Basic safety information
General safety information
Danger to life if the safety instructions are not taken into consideration
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
Safety function for ambient conditions
Warranty and liability for application examples
Fundamental safety instructions for Safety Integrated
Safety information_FH1_FHS
Safety Integrated functions
Safety Integrated functions
Safe Torque Off (STO)
Overview of the Safety Integrated functions
Supported safety functions
Examples of using the safety functions
Safety concept
Acceptance of the safety functions
Responsibilities
General information on acceptance
Content of an acceptance test
Documentation of acceptance
Acceptance test for Safe Torque Off (STO)
Report completion
System features
Current information
Certifications
Failure probability of the safety functions
Response times
Safety Integrated
EMERGENCY OFF and EMERGENCY STOP
Configuring
Requirements
Communication telegrams
Structure of the encoder position actual value
Structure of the encoder position actual value
Incremental encoder
IQ encoder
Encoderless / calculated
Absolute encoder BiSS
Commissioning the
Overview
Basics
Engineering
Drive parameters
Calling help information
Requirements for the commissioning
Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP TM Drive
Drive data sets
Content of drive data sets
Using the drive data set
Drive data export / import
Using preconfigured drive data sets
Using a user-defined drive data set
PMSM drive parameters
Drive parameters stepper motor
Motor encoder
Motor encoder
Encoder parameters, incremental encoder, IQ encoder and encoderless/calculated
Encoder parameters for absolute encoder BiSS-C
Assign encoder counting direction parameters
Setting the commutation angle offset and pole position identification
Calibration process of the commutation angle offset
Automatic encoder / pole position identification
Setpoint channel
Setpoint channel - Introduction
Reference values
Application limits
Ramp generator and speed setpoint filter
Controller settings
Controller settings
Speed control (cascade)
Automatic controlled system detection
Manual controller tuning Speed controller (cascade)
Controlled (I = const.)
OFF responses
DC-link voltage
Brake module
Brake module
Brake chopper
External motor holding brake
Messages/monitoring
Messages and monitors
Motor
Braking resistor
Power end stage
Dynamic torque reduction
Dynamic torque reduction
Programming
Introduction_new
Controlling TM Drive via the process image
Controlling a TM Drive via the instruction SINA_SPEED
Controlling TM Drive with a technology object
Maintenance
Firmware update
Stop responses
Interrupts, error messages and diagnostics and system alarms
Status and error displays
Diagnostics
Diagnostics overview of the TM Drive
Active messages
Drive diagnostics
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Derating of the ET 200SP TM Drive
Appendix
Response times
Braking resistor and brake chopper power
Data sets
Device disposal
Device disposal and data security
Directives and standards
F-TM StepDrive ST 1x24..48V 5A
Introduction
About SIMATIC Micro-Drive
About SIMATIC MICRO-DRIVE
About this information for use
Contents
Sales law
Contents
Keeping the documentation safe
Information regarding third-party products
Target group
What's new?
Standard scope
Use of third-party products in this documentation
Websites of third-party companies
SIMATIC documentation
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Service & Support
FAQ
ID link and Siemens Online Support
Spare parts services
Important product information
Intended use
Safety Evaluation Tool (SET)
Fundamental safety instructions
General safety instructions
Electric shock and danger to life due to other energy sources
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively high impedance
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively low impedance
Electric shock if there is no ground connection
Electric shock due to connection to an unsuitable power supply
Electric shock due to equipment damage
Electric shock due to unconnected cable shield
Arcing when a plug connection is opened during operation
Material damage caused by an incorrect power connection
Electromagnetic interference due to inadequate shield support
Active implant malfunctions due to electromagnetic fields
Symptomatic respiratory and skin reaction to chemicals
Unexpected machine movements caused by radio waves
Radio frequency interference in residential areas
EMC emission limits when connected to an isolated power system
Fire due to inadequate ventilation clearances
Overheating due to inadmissible mounting position
Device damage caused by incorrect insulation resistance tests
Device damage caused by incorrect voltage tests
Unexpected movement of machines caused by inactive safety functions
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Warranty and liability for application examples
Cybersecurity information
Industrial cybersecurity
Residual risks of power drive systems
Product overview
Area of application
Properties
Supported functions
Wiring
Pin assignment
Block diagram
Wiring of multiple TM Drive
Connecting the motor
Connecting the motor
Wiring the motor phases (stepper motor)
Connecting an encoder
Connecting an incremental encoders
Connecting safe torque off (Hardware STO)
Connecting the 24 V digital input
Safety functions integrated in the drive
Basic safety information
General safety information
Danger to life if the safety instructions are not taken into consideration
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
Safety function for ambient conditions
Warranty and liability for application examples
Fundamental safety instructions for Safety Integrated
Safety information_FH1_FHS
Safety Integrated functions
Safety Integrated functions
Safe Torque Off (STO)
Overview of the Safety Integrated functions
Supported safety functions
Examples of using the safety functions
Safety concept
Acceptance of the safety functions
Responsibilities
General information on acceptance
Content of an acceptance test
Documentation of acceptance
Acceptance test for Safe Torque Off (STO)
Report completion
System features
Current information
Certifications
Failure probability of the safety functions
Response times
Safety Integrated
EMERGENCY OFF and EMERGENCY STOP
Configuring
Requirements
Communication telegrams
Structure of the encoder position actual value
Structure of the actual encoder position value
Incremental encoder
Encoderless / calculated
Commissioning the
Overview
Basics
Engineering
Drive parameters
Calling help information
Requirements for the commissioning
Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP TM Drive
Drive data sets
Content of drive data sets
Using the drive data set
Using a user-defined drive data set
Drive parameters stepper motor
Motor encoder
Motor encoder
Encoder parameters incremental encoder and encoderless / calculated
Assign encoder counting direction parameters
Setpoint channel
Setpoint channel - Introduction
Reference values
Application limits
Ramp generator
Controller settings
Controller settings
Controlled (I = const.)
OFF responses
Intermediate circuit voltage
Brake module
Brake module
External motor holding brake
Messages/monitoring
Messages and monitors
Motor
Power end stage
Intermediate circuit voltage
Programming
Introduction_new
Controlling TM Drive via the process image
Controlling a TM Drive via the instruction SINA_SPEED
Controlling TM Drive with a technology object
Maintenance
Firmware update
Stop responses
Interrupts, error messages and diagnostics and system alarms
Status and error displays
Diagnostics
Diagnostics overview of the TM Drive
Active messages
Drive diagnostics
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Derating of the ET 200SP TM Drive
Appendix
Response times
Data sets
Device disposal
Device disposal and data security
Directives and standards
Fail-safe special modules (F-SM)
Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0)
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
Documentation Guide for Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST
Product overview
Properties of the F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST
Connecting
Terminal assignment
Block diagram
Parameters/address space
Parameters
Explanation of parameters
F-parameters
PM-parameters
Maximum test period
Parameters of the sensor supply
Short circuit test
Time for short circuit test
Startup time of sensors after short circuit test
Parameters of the inputs
Sensor evaluation
Discrepancy behavior
Discrepancy time
Reintegration after discrepancy error
Activated
Sensor supply
Input delay
Pulse extension
Chatter monitoring
Monitoring window
Parameters of the output
Activated
Controlling the output
Output type
Max. readback time dark test
Disable dark test for 48 hours
Max. readback time switch on test
Activated light test
Diagnosis: Wire break
Address space
Applications of the F-I/O module
Applications for the output DQ/P1 and P2
Conditions for achieving SIL/Category/PL
Applications: Safety mode up to SIL3/Cat.4/PLe
Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe
Application: Wiring a load to the digital output, PM switching
Application: Wiring a load to the digital output, PP switching
Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to the digital output, PM switching
Application: Wiring two loads in parallel to the digital output, PP switching
Applications for inputs
Applications of the electronic module
Application 1: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLd
Application 2: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.3/PLe
Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe
Application 3: Safety mode SIL3/Cat.4/PLe
Application 3.1 (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe)
Application 3.2 (SIL3/Cat.4/PLe)
Application for internal evaluation
Flexible
Applications for safety-related shutdown of standard modules
Safety-related shutdown of standard output modules, PM-switching
Safety-related shutdown of standard output modules, PP-switching
Interrupts/diagnostic messages
Status and error display
Interrupts
Diagnostic messages
Value status
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Response times
Response times
Minimum distance of test pulses
Switching of loads
Connecting capacitive loads
Switching of inductive loads
Product informations
Product Information for ET 200SP F-TM Count 1x1Vpp sin/cos HF (6ES7136-6CB00-0CA0)
Introduction
Validity
Security information
Incorrect counter value
Product Information for the documentation on Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0)
Security information
General amendments to the documentation
Product Information for the documentation on Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) as of firmware version V2.0.0
Security information
General amendments to the documentation
Parameters
Addendum to section "Max. readback time, dark test and shutdown test" of the "Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0)" manual
Deactivation dark test (max. SIL2, Cat. 3, PLd)
Applications of the F-I/O module
Minimum distance of test pulses
Product information on the ET 200SP fail-safe modules
Affected modules
Security information
Important note for maintaining the operational safety of your system - Upgrade to firmware version >= V1.0.5
Product Information for the Documentation of ET 200SP Fail-safe Modules
Security information
General amendments to the documentation
PFDavg and PFH values according to IEC 61508:2010 for components with use in SIMATIC Safety, Distributed Safety, PCS neo Safety and S7 F/FH Systems
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
PFDavg and PFH values according to IEC 61508:2010 for components with use in SIMATIC Safety, Distributed Safety, PCS neo Safety and S7 F/FH Systems
Product Information on documentation for the digital output module F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) as of firmware version V2.0.0
Security information
General amendments to the documentation
Parameters
Disable Dark Test (max. SIL2, CAT3, PLd)
Max. readback time, dark test and switch-off test
Applications of the F-I/O module
Technical specifications
Response times
Dependencies during configuration with GSD files for ET 200SP fail-safe modules
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Introduction
Dependencies F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0) as of firmware version V2.0.0
F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB01-0CA0) dependencies as of firmware version V1.0.0
Dependencies F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0)
Dependencies F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA01-0CA0)
Dependencies F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0) as of firmware version V2.0.0
Dependencies F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0)
Dependencies F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0)
Dependencies of F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) as of firmware version V1.0.2
Dependencies of F-AI 4xU 0..10V HF (6ES7136-6AB00-0CA1)
Product information for the ET 200SP fail-safe modules: Use at altitudes > 2000 m above sea level
Introduction
Security information
Affected modules
F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0)
F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF (6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0)
F-DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A PP HF (6ES7136-6DC00-0CA0)
F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0)
F-AI 4xI 0(4)..20mA 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7136-6AA00-0CA1) and F-AI 4xU 0..10V HF (6ES7136-6AB00-0CA1)
Product Information for the Documentation of ET 200SP Fail-safe Modules
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
General amendments to the documentation
Use of radio devices and cell phones
Supplement to the Attachment "Reaction times" of the Manuals "Power Module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST (6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0)" and "Digital Input Module F-DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0)"
Diagnostic messages
Product Information on fail-safe modules with GSD configuration
Security information
Security information
Introduction
Implementation of the Device_Fault bit in BP (Basic Protocol) mode of the fail-safe modules
BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00…)
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Information classes ET 200SP
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
New properties
Changes compared to previous version
Product overview
Product overview
BaseUnits for interface modules
BU type M0
Introduction
Product overview
Short designation
Connecting
Technical specifications
BaseCarrier
BC type A0, light-colored version
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BC type A0, dark-colored version
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BC type V0, BaseCarrier for server module
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
IO adapter
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BaseUnits for I/O modules
Product description
Introduction
BU type A0, light-colored version, with AUX terminals
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU type A0, light-colored version, without AUX terminals
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU type A0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU type A0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU type A1, light-colored version, with add-on terminals
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU type A1, light-colored version, without add-on terminals
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU type A1, dark-colored version, with add-on terminals
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU type A1, dark-colored version, without add-on terminals
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU type B0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU type B1, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU type C0, light-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU type C1, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over P1, P2 busbar
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU type D0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU type F0, dark-colored version, with AUX terminals, supply over supply terminals
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU type U0, light-colored version without AUX terminals
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU type U0, dark-colored version, without AUX terminals
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BaseUnits for motor starters
Introduction
Safety-related shutdown
BU30-MS1 - BaseUnit with 24 V DC and 500 V AC infeed
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU30-MS2 - BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU30-MS3 - BaseUnit with 24 V DC infeed
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU30-MS4 - BaseUnit without infeed
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU30-MS5 BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed and single F-DI
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU30-MS6 Base Unit without infeed and with single F-DI
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU30-MS7 BaseUnit with F-DI and 500 V AC infeed
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU30-MS8 BaseUnit with 500 V AC infeed and F-DI routing
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU30-MS9 BaseUnit with F-DI routing
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
BU30-MS10 BaseUnit with F-DI infeed
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
Potential distributor modules
Introduction
PotDis-BU type P1, light-colored version
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
PotDis-BU type P1, dark-colored version
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
PotDis-BU type P2, light-colored version
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
PotDis-BU type P2, dark-colored version
Short designation
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
PotDis-TB
Product overview
Connecting
Technical specifications
Dimension drawings of interface modules
Dimension drawings
BaseCarrier dimension drawings
Dimension drawings
Dimension drawings of I/O modules
Dimension drawings
Dimension drawings of motor starters
Dimension drawings
Dimension drawings of the potential distributor modules
Dimension drawings
BusAdapter
Introduction
Introduction
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
ET 200SP Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Tool support
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
Industrial Cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity-relevant information
Product overview
BusAdapter product overview
BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45
Product overview
Connecting
Diagnostics
Technical specifications
BusAdapter BA 2xFC
Product overview
Connecting
Diagnostics
Technical specifications
BusAdapter BA 2xM12
Product overview
Connecting
Diagnostics
Technical specifications
BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ
Product overview
Connecting
Diagnostics
Technical specifications
BusAdapter BA 2xLC
Product overview
Connecting
Diagnostics
Technical specifications
BusAdapter BA 2xLC-LD
Product overview
Connecting
Diagnostics
Technical specifications
BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45
Product overview
Connecting
Diagnostics
Technical specifications
BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC
Product overview
Connecting
Diagnostics
Technical specifications
BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45
Product overview
Connecting
Diagnostics
Technical specifications
BusAdapter BA LC/FC
Product overview
Connecting
Diagnostics
Technical specifications
BusAdapter BA LC-LD/RJ45
Product overview
Connecting
Diagnostics
Technical specifications
BusAdapter BA LC-LD/M12
Product overview
Connecting
Diagnostics
Technical specifications
BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
Product overview
Connecting
Diagnostics
Technical specifications
Strain relief
Product overview
Installing
Dimension drawings
BusAdapter dimension drawings
Strain relief dimension drawings
Accessories
Accessories
Compatibility
Compatibility
General information
CPU function manuals
Cycle and response times
Introduction
Introduction
Function Manuals documentation guide
Information classes Function Manuals
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety instructions
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Program execution
Principle of operation
Overload behavior
Cyclic program execution
Cyclic program execution
Cycle
Cycle time
Overview of cycle time
Different cycle times
Influences on the cycle time
Update time for process image partitions
User program execution time
Performance increase
Extension of cycle time due to communication load
Special consideration when PROFINET IO communication is configured on the 2nd PROFINET interface (X2)
Time-driven program execution in cyclic interrupts
Response time for cyclic and time-driven program execution
Summary of response time with cyclic and time-controlled program execution
Event-driven program execution
Response time of the CPUs when program execution is event-controlled
Process response time when program execution is event-driven
Process response time when program execution is event-driven
Cycle and response times of the S7-1500R/H redundant system
Introduction
Maximum cycle time and time errors
Influences on the cycle time of the S7-1500R/H redundant system
Influences on the cycle time in RUN-Solo system state
Influences on the cycle time in SYNCUP system state
Influences on the cycle time in RUN-Redundant system state
Influences on the cycle time when a CPU fails
Response time of R/H CPUs
Timetables for the RUN-Redundant system state
Structure and Use of the CPU Memory
Introduction
Introduction
Function Manuals documentation guide
Information classes Function Manuals
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety instructions
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Memory areas and retentive memory
Memory areas
Memory areas of the CPUs
Specifics of the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H
Memory requirements and memory usage
Retentive memory areas
Summary of retentive behavior
Retentive behavior of the memory objects
Memory behavior when loading software changes
Memory requirements for downloading software changes
Memory usage and application examples
Memory usage for data blocks
Memory usage for recipes
Memory usage for data logging
Overview of data logging
Data structure of the data logs
Instructions for data logging
Example program for data logging
Calculation of the data log size
SIMATIC memory card
SIMATIC memory card - Overview
Setting the card type
Data transfer with SIMATIC memory cards
Service life of the SIMATIC memory card
Expanding the load memory of the CPUs of the redundant system S7-1500R/H
Web server
Introduction
Introduction
Function manuals documentation guide
Information classes Function Manuals
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety and security instructions
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
General information
Properties of the Web server
Configuring the Web server
Certificate
Web server certificates
Managing certificates via TIA Portal
Managing certificates in runtime
Language settings
User management
Updating and saving information
Web pages
Start page with general CPU information
Diagnostics
Diagnostics buffer
Motion Control diagnostics
Module information
Firmware update
Alarms
Communication
Topology
Introduction
Graphical view
Tabular view
Status overview
Examples for graphical topology views
Tag status
Watch tables
Online backup
Record
DataLogs
DataLogs
Automated reading out of DataLogs
User files
User files
Automatically read or upload user files
User pages
User pages
AWP commands
AWP commands
PLC tags
PLC tags - Overview
Reading PLC tags
Writing PLC tags
Special tags
Enum types
Fragments
Arrays
Structures
Configuring user pages
Programming the WWW instruction
Defining the user page as start page
Example of a user page
Website for monitoring and controlling a wind turbine
Reading and displaying data from the CPU
Using enum types
Writing user inputs into the controller
Writing special tags
HTML code of the user page "Remote Wind Turbine Monitor"
Filebrowser
Reading out service data
Basic websites
API (Application Programming Interface)
Web API
Supported clients
Web API integration
Web API sessions
Ticket mechanism
Ticket mechanism
Api.BrowseTickets
Api.CloseTicket
Web API basic functions
Web API basic functions
Api.Login
Api.GetPermissions
Api.Browse
Api.Version
Api.Ping
Api.GetCertificateUrl
Api.Logout
Api.GetQuantityStructures
Api.ChangePassword
Api.GetPasswordPolicy
Api.GetAuthenticationMode
Setting the Web server default page
Setting the Web server default page
WebServer.SetDefaultPage
WebServer.ReadDefaultPage
Reading and writing process data
Supported data types
Parameter assignment of the block properties
PlcProgram.Read
PlcProgram.Write
PlcProgram.DownloadProfilingData
PlcProgram.Browse
Reading and changing the operating mode
Plc.ReadOperatingMode
Plc.RequestChangeOperatingMode
Plc.ReadModeSelectorState
Change time settings via Web API
Plc.ReadSystemTime
Plc.SetSystemTime
Plc.ReadTimeSettings
Plc.SetTimeSettings
Reading diagnostics and service data
Project.ReadLanguages
Alarms.Browse
Alarms.Acknowledge
Syslog.Browse
DiagnosticBuffer.Browse
Modules.DownloadServiceData
Backing up and restoring the configuration
Plc.CreateBackup
Plc.RestoreBackup
Accessing the contents of the SIMATIC Memory Card
Access to file system
Files.Browse
Files.Download
Files.Create
Files.Rename
Files.Delete
Files.CreateDirectory
Files.DeleteDirectory
DataLogs.DownloadAndClear
Reading information from SIMATIC Safety
Failsafe.ReadRuntimeGroups
Failsafe.ReadParameters
Web applications that can be loaded by the user
Web applications that can be loaded by the user
WebApp.Create
WebApp.Delete
WebApp.Rename
WebApp.Browse
WebApp.SetState
WebApp.SetDefaultPage
WebApp.SetNotFoundPage
WebApp.SetNotAuthorizedPage
WebApp.BrowseResources
WebApp.CreateResource
WebApp.DeleteResource
WebApp.RenameResource
WebApp.DownloadResource
WebApp.SetResourceVisibility
WebApp.SetResourceETag
WebApp.SetResourceMediaType
WebApp.SetResourceModificationTime
Web server
Introduction
Introduction
Function Manuals documentation guide
Information classes Function Manuals
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety instructions
General security information
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity-relevant information in this manual
Setting up and calling a web server
Properties of the Web server
Configuring the Web server
System web pages and previous web pages
Certificates
Web server certificates
Managing certificates via TIA Portal
Managing certificates in runtime
Installing certificates for the web browser
Language settings
User management
System web pages
Working with system web pages
Getting started
Authentication
Overview
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics buffer
Hardware status
Redundancy
Motion Control
User program
User program
Recipes
User files
Alarming & Logging
Alarming & Logging
Alarms
Data logs
Maintenance
Maintenance
File browser
Service data
Safety
Safety
Safety administration
API (Application Programming Interface)
Web API
Supported clients
Web API integration
Web API sessions
Web API basic functions
Web API basic functions
Api.Login
Api.Logout
Api.GetPermissions
Api.ChangePassword
Api.GetPasswordPolicy
Api.GetAuthenticationMode
Api.GetSessionInfo
Api.Browse
Api.Version
Api.Ping
Api.GetCertificateUrl
Api.GetQuantityStructures
Ticket mechanism
Ticket mechanism
Api.BrowseTickets
Api.CloseTicket
User-configurable HTTP response headers
Reading and writing user-configurable HTTP response headers
WebServer.ReadResponseHeaders
WebServer.ChangeResponseHeaders
Setting the web server default page
Setting the web server default page
WebServer.SetDefaultPage
WebServer.ReadDefaultPage
User-defined web applications
User-defined web applications
Interaction between web applications
WebApp.Create
WebApp.Delete
WebApp.Rename
WebApp.Browse
WebApp.SetState
WebApp.SetDefaultPage
WebApp.SetNotFoundPage
WebApp.SetNotAuthorizedPage
WebApp.BrowseResources
WebApp.CreateResource
WebApp.DeleteResource
WebApp.RenameResource
WebApp.DownloadResource
WebApp.SetResourceVisibility
WebApp.SetResourceETag
WebApp.SetResourceMediaType
WebApp.SetResourceModificationTime
WebApp.SetVersion
WebApp.SetUrlRedirectMode
Reading and writing process data
Supported data types
Parameter assignment of the block properties
PlcProgram.Read
PlcProgram.Write
PlcProgram.DownloadProfilingData
PlcProgram.Browse
Plc.ReadMemoryInformation
Project.ReadInformation
Reading and changing the operating mode
Plc.ReadOperatingMode
Plc.RequestChangeOperatingMode
Plc.ReadModeSelectorState
Plc.ReadRuntimeInformation
Changing time settings via Web API
Plc.ReadSystemTime
Plc.SetSystemTime
Plc.ReadTimeSettings
Plc.SetTimeSettings
Reading diagnostics and service data
Project.ReadLanguages
Alarms.Browse
Alarms.Acknowledge
Syslog.Browse
DiagnosticBuffer.Browse
Modules.DownloadServiceData
Communication.ReadProtocolResources
Motion Control
Parameter assignment of the block properties
Technology.BrowseObjects
Technology.Read
Backing up and restoring the configuration
Plc.CreateBackup
Plc.RestoreBackup
Accessing contents of the SIMATIC load memory
Access to file system
Files.Browse
Files.Download
Files.Create
Files.Rename
Files.Delete
Files.CreateDirectory
Files.DeleteDirectory
DataLogs.DownloadAndClear
Reading information from SIMATIC Safety
Failsafe.ReadRuntimeGroups
Failsafe.ReadParameters
Reading CPU information
Plc.ReadCpuType
Plc.ReadStationName
Plc.ReadModuleName
Plc.ReadLoadMemoryInformation
Reading information about device configuration
Device configuration
Modules.Browse
Modules.ReadParameters
Modules.ReadIdentificationMaintenance
Modules.ReadStatus
Modules.FlashLeds
Modules.ReadLeds
Reading information from a redundant system
Redundancy.ReadSystemInformation
Redundancy.ReadSystemState
Redundancy.RequestChangeSystemState
Redundancy.ReadSyncupProgress
Target 1500S™ for Simulink® V4.0 Update 2
Introduction
Guide for this manual
Guide to documentation S7-1500 / ET 200MP
Manual Collection ET 200SP
Security information
Security information
Siemens Industry Online Support
Industry Mall
Product overview
Overview of functions
Basic procedure
Installing
System requirements
Installing Target 1500S
Licensing Target 1500S
Uninstalling Target 1500S
Repairing Target 1500S
Example of a workflow
Creating a Simulink model
Description of Simulink parameters
Target 1500S configuration parameters
Description of the TIA Portal integration options
Description of the external mode options
Description of the Accessibility options
Description of the Post-build Options
Description of the ODK options
Command line access to options
Running Simulink build
The Diagnostic Viewer
Loading and running the ODK application
Using an example project
Files generated by coders
Files generated by coders
Referenced models
Referenced models
External mode
The external mode
Setting communication parameters for external mode
The function block CallExtMode
Establishing an external mode connection
Parameter access from STEP 7
Introduction
Enabling parameter access
The ReadWriteParameters function block
Establishing parameter access
Access to internal signals
Access to internal signals
Display model on the Web server
Notes on protection
The WebReadWrite function block
Adding files to a STEP 7 project
Using the Web server
Web access to parameters
Display signals on the Web server
Show active Stateflow states on the Web server
Using data types
Bus objects
Supported basic data types
Complex data types
Alarms
Alarms during the build process
Information messages
Warnings
Error messages
S7-PLCSIM Advanced
Introduction
General information
S7-PLCSIM Advanced documentation guide
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Administrator rights
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction
Introduction
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Basic information on industrial cybersecurity
Definition of industrial cybersecurity
Objectives of industrial cybersecurity
Operational application environment and security assumptions
Intended use
Requirements for the operational application environment and security assumptions
Secure operation
Secure operation
Security update notification
Hardening measures
Access control
Notifications about security vulnerabilities (Siemens Security Advisories)
Data backup
Secure uninstallation
Product overview
What is S7-PLCSIM Advanced?
S7-PLCSIM products
Supported CPUs
Compatibility in case of updates
Security for S7-PLCSIM Advanced
Supporting simulation
Differences between a simulated and a real CPU
Overview
Restrictions for all supported CPUs
Notes
Password to protect confidential configuration data
Installing
Introduction
System requirements
Restrictions due to antivirus programs
Licenses
Trial License
Installation log
Contents of the S7-PLCSIM Advanced package
Installing S7-PLCSIM Advanced
Changing an installation
Repairing an installation
Uninstalling the product
Communication paths
Communication
Local communication
Communication via TCP / IP
Communication via TCP/IP in Single Adapter Network Mode (promiscuous mode)
Communication via TCP/IP in Multiple Adapter Network Mode (non-promiscuous mode)
Enable distributed communication
Simulating
Simulating a CPU
Basic procedure for the simulation
Control Panel - User interface
S7-PLCSIM Advanced Symbol
Control Panel quick view and window
S7-PLCSIM Advanced Control Panel
Importing instances
Downloading a STEP 7 project
Network addresses in the simulation
Siemens PLCSIM Virtual Ethernet Adapter
S7-PLCSIM Advanced instances
Simulate communication
Communication services that can be simulated
Communication between instances
Provide project data offline for simulation
Simulating a CPU with ODK functionality
ODK
Special features of ODK
Loading functions
Calling functions
Unloading functions
Simulating Motion Control
Simulating the SIMATIC Drive Controller
Simulating a redundant S7-1500R/H system
Virtual time response
Virtual and real time
Speed up and slow down simulation
Restrictions, messages, and solution
Overview
OPC UA server
Web server
Backing up and restoring the configuration of an S7-PLCSIM Advanced instance
Update of a TIA Portal project to a new CPU firmware
Restrictions for storage paths
Restrictions for instance names
Restrictions for communications services
Restrictions for instructions
Restrictions to local communication via Softbus
Unknown data records
Messages for communication via TCP/IP
Time synchronization via NTP mode
Restrictions of security with VMware vSphere Hypervisor (ESXi)
Restrictions for Hyper-V
Restrictions for AWS Cloud
Monitoring overflow
Deviating I/O values in the STEP 7 user program
Multiple simulations and possible collision of IP addresses
Lacking access to an IP address
Simulation in standby mode
Simulation start of SIMIT with S7-PLCSIM Advanced
Known restrictions when operating with a co-simulation, for example, SIMIT
ET 200SP CPUs: Use of BusAdapters with fiber-optic interface
Installing SIMATIC NET
No simulation for configuration control
Communication interface is not updated on the control panel when using an older API
Trace jobs with duplicate timestamps for motion OBs
The control panel shows VPNs
Downloading a central CP with S7-1500R/H CPU family using TCP/IP
Axis control panel functionality
Cannot locate S7-PLCSIM Advanced Instances
Synchronization of IRT systems
Simulated PLC will not RUN with local I/O send clock
Download error after change to "IP address from DHCP server" in STEP 7
Software PLC interfaces not showing after download
Out of memory error when creating instances
Input area within the Startup OB resets upon execution
"Show Notifications" enabled in the Control Panel but notifications are not showing
Starting an instance from a virtual memory card that has a safety program
Connecting to interface/subnet in STEP 7
Using "Protection of confidential PLC configuration data" with a TIA Portal V20 project
Maximum quantity structure for Software/Open Controller
Out of memory error when creating instances
Motion restrictions for the S7-1200 G2 family CPUs
Restriction for "Optional I/O device" selection in STEP 7
Restricted support for onboard I/O devices with S7-1200 G2 instances
Restriction for Ethernet/IP instruction
Restriction for using "Upload as new station" in STEP 7 with an S7-1200 G2 CPU
List of abbreviations
Abbreviations
S7-PLCSIM Advanced API
Introduction
General information
S7-PLCSIM Advanced documentation guide
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Administrator rights
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction
Introduction
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Basic information on industrial cybersecurity
Definition of industrial cybersecurity
Objectives of industrial cybersecurity
Operational application environment and security assumptions
Intended use
Requirements for the operational application environment and security assumptions
Secure operation
Secure operation
Security update notification
Hardening measures
Access control
Notifications about security vulnerabilities (Siemens Security Advisories)
Data backup
Secure uninstallation
Product overview
What is S7-PLCSIM Advanced?
Functions for licenses
Components of the Simulation Runtime
System requirements
Restrictions due to antivirus programs
Access to instances
Interfaces of the Simulation Runtime
Transfer parameters
Overview of interfaces for native C++
Overview of interfaces for managed code
Restrictions for file paths
Overview of data types for native C++
Overview of data types for managed code
Initialize API
Load API library
Native C++
InitializeApi()
RuntimeApiEntry_Initialize
.NET (C#)
Initialize
Shut down API
Native C++
Shut down API
DestroyInterface()
RuntimeApiEntry_DestroyInterface
FreeApi()
ShutdownAndFreeApi()
.NET (C#)
Shut down API
Global functions (Native C++)
Global functions
IBaseRuntimeManager
Simulation runtime instances
Interfaces for IBaseRuntimeManager
ISimulationRuntimeManager
Remote connections
Remote connections
RunAutodiscover()
Events for ISimulationRuntimeManager
Description
OnConfigurationChanged events
OnRuntimeManagerLost events
OnAutodiscoverData events
Interfaces for ISimulationRuntimeManager
IInstance
Interfaces for IInstances
Controller - Information and settings
Operating state
Stop simulation
Tag list
I/O access
Synchronizing inputs and outputs
Simulate peripheral I/O
I/O access via address - Reading
I/O access via address - Writing
I/O access via tag name - Reading
I/O access via tag name - Writing
Settings for the virtual time
Cycle control
Virtual and real time
Cycle time control
Monitoring overflow
Display functions and events
Display functions
OnDisplayDataChanged events
Acyclic services
Overview
ReadRecordDone/WriteRecordDone
AlarmNotification
ProcessEvent
PullOrPlugEvent
StatusEvent
ProfileEvent
UpdateEvent
GetConfiguredProcessEvent
RackOrStationFaultEvent
Events for IInstances
Events for operating state and cycle control
Description
Synchronize simulation partner
Synchronize simulation partner cycle-controlled
Synchronize simulation partner time-controlled
OnOperatingStateChanged events
OnLedChanged events
OnSoftwareConfigurationChanged events
OnIPAddressChanged events
OnSyncPointReached events
OnHardwareConfigChanged events
Events for acyclic services
OnDataRecordRead / OnDataRecordWrite events
OnAlarmNotification events
OnProcessEvent events
OnPullOrPlugEvent events
OnStatusEvent events
OnProfileEvent events
OnUpdateEvent events
RackOrStationFault events
IRemoteRuntimeManager
Interfaces - Information and settings
Interfaces for IRemoteRuntimeManager
Events for IRemoteRuntimeManager
OnConnectionLost events
Data types
Information on data types
DLL import functions (Native C++)
ApiEntry_Initialize
ApiEntry_DestroyInterface
Event callback functions (Native C++)
EventCallback_VOID
EventCallback_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32
EventCallback_SRRSI_AD
EventCallback_IRRTM
EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SROS_SROS
EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32
EventCallback_II_SREC_ST
EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SRLT_SRLM
EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDRI
EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_SDRI_BYTE
EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32
EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32
EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32
EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET
EventCallback_II_SREC_ST_UINT32
Delegate definitions (managed code)
Delegate_Void
Delegate_DisplayDataChanged
Delegate_SRCC_UINT32_UINT32_INT32
Delegate_SRRSI_AD
Delegate_II_EREC_DT
Delegate_II_EREC_DT_EOS_EOS
Delegate_II_EREC_DT_ELT_ELM
Delegate_II_EREC_DT_UINT32_INT64_INT64_UINT32
Delegate_IRRTM
Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDRI
Delegate_II_EREC_DT_SDR
Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_EPPET_UINT32
Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32_EPET_UINT32
Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32
Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_UINT32
Delegate_SREC_ST_UINT32_ERSFET
Definitions and constants
Unions (Native C++)
UIP
UDataValue
Structures
Structures overview
SDataValue
SDVBNI
SDataValueByAddress
SDataValueByAddressWithCheck
SDataValueByName
SDataValueByNameWithCheck
SConnectionInfo
SDisplayData
SInstanceInfo
SDimension
STagInfo
SIP
SIPSuite4
SOnSyncPointReachedResult
SDataRecordInfo
SDataRecord
SConfiguredProcessEvents
SDiagExtChannelDescription
SAutodiscoverData
SMAC address
SNetInterfaceInfo
Enumerations
Enumerations overview
ERuntimeErrorCode
EArea
EOperatingState
EOperatingMode
ECPUType
ECommunicationInterface
EDisplayKey
ENetworkMode
EPLCInterface
ELEDType
ELEDMode
EPrimitiveDataType
EDataType
ETagListDetails
ERuntimeConfigChanged
EPullOrPlugEventType
EProcessEventType
ESoftwareConfigChanged
EDirection
EDiagProperty
EDiagSeverity
ERackOrStationFaultType
ECycleTimeMonitoringMode
EAutodiscoverType
ESecurityMode
Examples/applications
Example: Communication via TCP/IP in Single Adapter Network Mode (promiscuous mode)
Example: Communication via TCP/IP in Multi-Adapter Network Mode (non-promiscuous mode)
Diagnostics function manuals
Diagnostics
Introduction
Introduction
Function Manuals documentation guide
Information classes Function Manuals
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety instructions
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Overview of system diagnostics
Properties of system diagnostics
Benefits of innovative system diagnostics
Quick start
Quick start
Using the display of the CPU
Using STEP 7
Configuring and determining system diagnostics
Setting options
Configuring system diagnostics in the CPU properties
Configuring alarms for system diagnostics in the project
Options for displaying system diagnostics
Example for determining diagnostics and display options
Diagnostics information at the devices
LEDs
Display of the CPU
Diagnostics information in STEP 7
Explanation of diagnostics symbols
Accessible devices (without project)
Devices & networks
Online & diagnostics
"Diagnostics" tab in the Inspector window
CPU diagnostics buffer
"Online tools" task card
Configuring the settings for I/O modules in STEP 7
Diagnostics information using the web server
Showing diagnostic information on an HMI device
Showing diagnostic information on an HMI device
Configuring system diagnostics
Different views of the system diagnostics view
Inserting system diagnostics indicator
Configuring button as system diagnostics indicator
System diagnostics in WinCC Unified
System diagnostics by means of the user program
Options of system diagnostics in the user program
System diagnostics using process image inputs
Alarms
Creating alarms in the user program
Creating alarms with the "Program_Alarm" instruction
Editing alarms in the alarm editor
Display of program alarms
Output of the alarm state with the "Get_AlarmState" instruction
Example program for program alarms
Task
Example 1: Program alarm without associated values
Example 2: Program alarm with associated value
Displaying the alarm
Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system
Diagnostics of the S7-1500R/H redundant system
Online and Diagnostics view
"Online Tools" task card
Diagnostics view in the project tree and in the device view and network view
Diagnostics in the RUN-Redundant system state
Restrictions in the RUN-Solo system state
System diagnostics by means of the user program
Trace and logic analyzer function
Introduction
Purpose, conventions and additional information
Function Manuals documentation guide
Information classes Function Manuals
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety instructions
General safety instructions
Warnings in this document
Industrial cybersecurity
Industrial cybersecurity (introduction)
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Overview of functions
Application areas for trace and logic analyzer functions
Measured value recording with a trace
Measured value recording with a trace
How a trace works
Functionality of an installed trace
Configuration overview
Evaluation options
Measured value recording with a long-term trace
Measured value recording with a long-term trace
How a long-term trace works
Configuration overview
Evaluation options
Measured value recording with a project trace
Measured value recording with a project trace
How a project trace works
Configuration overview
Time synchronization
Trigger time for RT communication
Evaluation options
Measured value recording with a long-term project trace
Measured value recording with a long-term project trace
How a long-term project trace works
Configuration overview
Time synchronization
Trigger time for RT communication
Evaluation options
Supported hardware
Displaying and analyzing measured values
Using trace functions
Configuring
Configuring the trace
Guide to using a trace
Add a new trace to the project
Selecting signals
Activate event recording
Configure sampling
Configure trigger mode
Set the measurement in the device (memory card)
Configuring the long-term trace
Guide to using a long-term trace
Add a new long-term trace to the project
Select signals
Configure sampling
Configure target path for long-term trace recording
Configuring the project trace
Guide to using a project trace
Add a new project trace to the project
Select participating devices
Selecting signals
Configure sampling
Configure trigger mode
Configure long-term project trace
Guide to using a long-term project trace
Add a new long-term project trace to the project
Select participating devices
Select signals
Configure sampling
Configure target path for long-term project trace recording
Transfer configuration
Transfer installed trace to the project as a configuration
Deleting a trace from the device
Export configuration
Import configuration
Create a configuration from an existing measurement
Recording
Activating/deactivating a recording
Automatically repeat recording
Monitor ongoing recording in the time diagram
Set the view of the curve diagram
Display of the recording in the curve diagram
Bring a signal into the foreground
Scale the display in the curve diagram
Show or hide individual signals and adapt color
Additional display options for the trend diagram
Save recordings as measurements
Preface
Save the recording as measurement in the project
Import measurement
Export measurement
Add a measurement in the device to measurements in the project
Setting options and displays in the Measurements tab
Evaluating the measurement
Note
Compare measurements (combined measurement)
Requirements
Apply combined measurement
Adding measurements for comparison
Export combined measurement
Import combined measurement
Working with the signal table
Preface
Requirements
Select signals of the measurements for the signal table
Show or hide individual signals in the signal table and change the color
Selecting individual bits for display as a bit track
Bring a signal from the signal table to the foreground
Use signal group in the signal table
Setting options and displays in the signal table
Use measurement cursor
Requirements
Check that a certain value has been reached
Evaluation of the difference between two samples
Aligning measurements with measurement cursor
Setting options and displays of the "Measurement cursor" palette
Keyboard and context menu commands
Calculate signals with formula editor
Preface
Requirements
Create and edit formulas
Mathematical functions of the formula editor
Create an FFT diagram
Create a Bode diagram
Snapshots
Status overview of the participating devices
Remedy for errors
Devices
S7-1200/1500 CPUs
Recordable variables
Lifetime of the configuration and recorded values in the device
Recording levels
Time synchronization with Motion Control
Quantity structure
Long-term trace recording
Long-term project trace recording
CPU load through trace recording
Project trace
Software user interface of the configuration
Layout of the trace user interface
Layout of the long-term trace user interface
Layout of the project trace user interface
Layout of the interface for long-term project trace
User interface - Signals
Recording conditions
User interface - Recording conditions
Data types for trigger tags
Trigger event
Configuration
Trace configuration - overview
Long-term trace configuration – overview
Configuring long-term project trace - Overview
Select participating devices
Selecting signals
Configuring the recording cycle and duration
Configuring the trigger conditions
Configure installed measurements (memory card)
Configuring the recording cycle and target path for long-term trace
Configuring recording cycle and target path for long-term project trace
Communication function manuals
Communication
Introduction
Introduction
SiePortal
Function Manuals documentation guide
Information classes Function Manuals
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
S7 Port Configuration Tool (S7-PCT)
S7 Port Configuration Tool (S7-PCT)
S7 Failsafe Configuration Tool (S7-FCT)
S7 Failsafe Configuration Tool (S7-FCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Security information
General security information
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Security-relevant information in this manual
Product overview
Product overview
Communications services
Overview of communication options
Communications protocols and port numbers used for Ethernet communication
Overview of connection resources
Setting up a connection
Data consistency
Secure Communication
Basics of Secure Communication
Useful information on Secure Communication
Device-dependent security features
Confidentiality through encryption
Authenticity and integrity through signatures
Managing certificates
What you should know about the certificate management
Certificate management with TIA Portal
Examples for the management of certificates.
How communication with certificates works: HTTP over TLS
Tip: Updating loaded certificates in RUN
Requirements for secure communication
Protection of confidential configuration data
Useful information for the protection of confidential PLC configuration data
Changing your password
Resetting the password
Assign password via SIMATIC Memory Card
Special features when backing up and restoring a CPU
Tips for error avoidance and error handling
Rules for the replacement parts scenario
Secure Open User Communication
Secure OUC of an S7-1500 CPU as TLS client to an external PLC (TLS server)
Secure OUC of an S7-1500 CPU as TLS server to an external PLC (TLS client)
Secure OUC between two S7-1500 CPUs
Secure OUC via CP interface
Secure OUC with Modbus TCP
Secure OUC via e-mail
Secure PG/HMI communication
PG/HMI communication based on standardized security mechanisms
Additional settings for the secure PG/HMI communication
Tip for certificate-based communication between PG and CPU
CPU behavior from loading to operational readiness
Using secure HMI communication
Using Legacy PG/PC communication for TIA Portal
Information about compatibility
SNMP
Activating and deactivating SNMP
Activating/deactivating SNMP by data record transfer: Example for a CPU 1516-3 PN/DP
Activating/deactivating SNMP by data record transfer with S7-1500R/H CPUs
PG communication
PG communication
HMI communication
HMI communication
Open User Communication
Overview of Open User Communication
Protocols for Open User Communication
Instructions for Open User Communication
Open User Communication with addressing via domain names
Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO
Setting up communication over FDL
Setting up communication with Modbus TCP
Setting up communication via e-mail
Setting up communication via FTP
Establishment and termination of communications relations
S7 communication
S7 communication
Point-to-point link
Point-to-point link
OPC UA communication
What you need to know about OPC UA
OPC UA and Industry 4.0
General features of OPC UA
OPC UA for S7-1200/S7-1500 CPUs
Access to OPC UA applications
Addressing nodes
Namespace overview for the OPC UA server of the S7-1200/1500 CPUs
What you need to know about OPC UA clients
Security at OPC UA
Security settings
Certificates pursuant to ITU X.509
Certificates with OPC UA
Creating self-signed certificates
Generating PKI key pairs and certificates yourself
Secure transfer of messages
Certificate management via Global Discovery Server (GDS)
Automated certificate management with GDS
Configuration limits for Push function
Setting and loading GDS parameters
GDS commissioning
Address model for the push certificate management
CertificateGroups in the address model
Role-based security in OPC UA
Interesting facts about role-based security
Configuring role-based access control for OPC UA
How the OPC UA server evaluates permissions on nodes
Importing nodeset files with role definitions
Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Interesting information about the OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPUs
The OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPUs
End points of the OPC UA server
Mapping of data types
Runtime behavior of the OPC UA server
Accessing OPC UA server data
Client accesses and local accesses to the OPC UA server
Managing write and read rights
Managing write and read rights for a complete DB
Coordinating write and read rights for CPU tags
Consistency of CPU tags
Write accesses to OPC UA variables from S7-1500 Motion Control.
Accessing OPC UA server data
MinimumSamplingInterval attribute
Export OPC UA XML file
Configuring the OPC UA server
Enabling the OPC UA server
Access to the OPC UA server
General settings of the OPC UA server
Settings of the server for subscriptions
Using the TransferSubscription service
Handling client and server certificates
Generating server certificates with STEP 7
User authentication
Users and roles with OPC UA function rights
Diagnostic settings of the server
License for OPC UA
OPC UA server interface configuration
What is a server interface?
Using OPC UA companion specifications
Creating a server interface for companion specification
Creating a user-defined server interface
Data types for companion specifications
LocalizedText and ByteString data types
Using additional OPC UA data types for companion specifications
Dynamic arrays
Rules for OPC UA XML files
Creating a server interface for reference namespace
Generating OPC UA nodes based on local data mappings of FB types and UDTs
Notes on configuration limits when using server interfaces
Providing methods on the OPC UA server
Useful information about server methods
Boundary conditions for using server methods
Providing alarms on the OPC UA server
Useful information on alarms
OPC UA Events
OPC UA conditions and OPC UA alarms
Activating Alarms and Conditions
Subscribing to events of an OPC UA server
Processing associated values of alarms
Simultaneous receipt of messages in multiple languages
Methods for OPC UA Alarms and Conditions
Handling memory limits for OPC UA Alarms and Conditions
Using diagnostics options
Diagnostics of the OPC UA server
Running diagnostics for OPC UA servers in the program
Server state transition diagnostics
Session state transition diagnostics
Check for security events
Request of a remote client failed
Subscription diagnostics
Summarizing diagnostics
Using the S7-1500 CPU as an OPC UA client
Overview and requirements
Useful information about the client instructions
Number of client instructions that can be used simultaneously
Example configuration for OPC UA
Creating client interfaces
Determine server interface online
Using multilingual texts
Rules for the access to structures
Using connection parameter assignment
Creating and configuring connections
Handling of the client certificates of the S7-1500 CPU
Handling client certificates during runtime
User authentication
Using a configured connection
Tips and recommendations
Rules for subscriptions
Rules for the user program
Master copies for OPC UA communication
Addressing via DHCP
Introduction
Principle of address assignment via DHCP
DHCP with DNS
Activate DHCP
Configuring the client ID
Get addresses of the DNS servers via DHCP
Get addresses of the NTP servers via DHCP
Obtain host and domain name via DHCP
Routing
Overview of the routing mechanisms of S7-1500 CPUs
S7 routing
IP forwarding
Overview of IP forwarding
Enabling and disabling IP forwarding
Enabling/disabling IP forwarding via data record transfer: Example for a CPU 1516-3 PN/DP
Enabling/disabling IP forwarding via data record transfer with S7-1500R/H CPUs
Data record routing
Virtual interface for IP-based applications
Connection resources
Connection resources of a station
Allocation of connection resources
Display of the connection resources
Diagnostics and fault correction
Connection diagnostics
Emergency address
Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H
Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H
System IP addresses for R/H CPUs
System IP addresses for communications processors
Improved accessibility by switching the system IP address
Behavior during SYNCUP
Response to primary-backup switchover
Connection resources of the redundant system S7-1500R/H
HMI communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H
HMI connection via the system IP address
Open User Communication with the redundant system S7-1500R/H
Overview
Setting up the connection of the Open User Communication with the redundant S7-1500R/H system
Open User Communication with CP 1543-1 communications processors
Using an OPC UA server in an S7-1500R/H system
Information worth knowing on the OPC UA server in the S7-1500R/H system
Transparent Mode (transparent Redundancy)
Non-transparent Mode (non-transparent Redundancy)
Information model in detail
Updated instructions for server methods
Industrial Ethernet Security with CP 1543-1
Industrial Ethernet Security
Firewall
Logging
NTP client
SNMP
VPN
PROFINET with STEP 7
Introduction
Introduction
SiePortal
Function manuals documentation guide
Information classes Function Manuals
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
S7 Port Configuration Tool (S7-PCT)
S7 Port Configuration Tool (S7-PCT)
S7 Failsafe Configuration Tool (S7-FCT)
S7 Failsafe Configuration Tool (S7-FCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety instructions
General security information
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity-related information in this manual
Description
Introduction to PROFINET
Introduction
PROFINET terms
Basic terminology of communication
PROFINET interface
Implementation of the PROFINET device model in SIMATIC
PROFINET Security Class 1
PROFINET Security Class 1
Setting up PROFINET
Introduction
Active Network Components
Cabling technology
Wireless design
Basics
Tips on assembly
Network security
Basics
Network components and software
Application example
Parameter assignment/addressing
Introduction to parameter assignment/addressing
Assigning an IO device to an IO controller
Device name and IP address
Introduction to device names and IP addresses
Device name
IP address
Assigning a device name and IP address
Assign device name via communication table
Permitting changes to the device name and IP address directly on the device
Configuring an IO device through hardware detection
Specifying the router for a PROFINET IO device
Configuring topology
Topology
Topology view in STEP 7
Interconnecting ports in the topology view
Interconnecting ports - Inspector window
Automatic assignment of devices by offline/online comparison
Apply the port interconnections identified online manually to the project
Include the devices identified online manually in the project
Automatic assignment of devices by advanced offline/online comparison
Diagnostics and maintenance
Diagnostics mechanisms of PROFINET IO
Basic principles of the diagnostics in PROFINET IO
Diagnostics levels in PROFINET IO
Diagnostics via LEDs
Diagnostics via the display of the S7-1500 CPUs
Diagnostics via Web server
Online diagnostics with STEP 7
Extended maintenance concept
Diagnostics of the network topology
Diagnostics in the user program
Diagnostics and configuration data records
Evaluate diagnostics in the user program
Maintenance
I&M data (identification and maintenance)
Loading I&M data to PROFINET IO devices and your modules
Asset management
Further information about asset management at PROFINET
Content and structure of an asset management record
Asset management data record for I-devices
Functions
Introduction
Connecting other bus systems
Connecting other bus systems
Linking PROFINET and PROFIBUS
Connect the DP slave via the IE/PB Link to a PROFINET IO system
Intelligent IO devices (I-devices)
I-device functionality
Properties and Advantages of the I-Device
Characteristics of an I-Device
Data Exchange between higher- and lower-level IO system
Configuring the I-device
Program examples
Diagnostics and interrupt characteristics
Rules for the Topology of a PROFINET IO System with I-Device
Boundary conditions when using I-devices
Configuring PROFIenergy with I-devices
Enabling/disabling I-device in the user program of the I-device CPU
Shared device
Useful information on shared devices
Shared device and assigned IO controllers in the common project
Configuring a shared device in a common project
Shared device and assigned IO controllers in different projects
Configuring a shared device for different projects
Shared I-device and assigned IO controllers in the common project
Configuring a shared I-device in the common project
Configuring a shared I-device in different projects
Module-internal shared input/shared output (MSI/MSO)
Media redundancy (ring topologies)
Options of media redundancy
Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP)
Configuring media redundancy
Media redundancy with planned duplication of frames (MRPD; not for S7-1500R/H)
Multiple rings
MRP interconnection
Real-time communication
Introduction
RT
IRT
Comparison of RT and IRT
Configuring PROFINET IO with IRT
Setting the bandwidth usage for the send clock
Setup recommendations for optimizing PROFINET
Limitation of the data infeed into the network
PROFINET with performance upgrade
Introduction
Dynamic frame packing
Fragmentation
Fast forwarding
Configuration of IRT with high performance
Sample configuration for IRT with high performance
Isochronous mode
What is isochronous mode?
Use of isochronous mode
Time sequence of synchronization on PROFINET IO
Configuring isochronous mode
Introduction
Configuring isochronous mode on PROFINET IO
Setting the application cycle and delay time
Programming isochronous mode
Basics of Programming
Program execution according to the IPO model
Program execution according to the OIP model
Operating multiple PROFINET networks in isochronous mode
Useful information on the operation of several PROFINET networks in isochronous mode
Configuring the synchronization of the send clocks of PROFINET interfaces
Operating several CPUs in isochronous mode
Programming manual synchronization
Operating multiple projects isochronously
Introduction
Cross-project clock synchronization with an I-device
Direct data exchange
Introduction
Configuring direct data exchange between two S7-1500 CPUs
Configuring direct data exchange between multiple IO controllers
Device replacement without exchangeable medium
What is device replacement without exchangeable medium/programming device?
Device replacement without exchangeable medium/PG function
Replacing an IO device without exchangeable medium
Permit overwriting of PROFINET device name
Standard machine projects
Standard machine projects
Multiple use IO systems
What you should know about multiple use IO systems
Configuring multiple use IO systems
Adapt multiple use IO systems locally
Configuration control for IO systems
Information about configuration control of IO systems
Configuring IO devices as optional
Enabling optional IO devices in the program
Configuring flexible order of IO devices
Customizing arrangement of IO devices in the program
System behavior and rules
Saving energy with PROFIenergy
PROFIenergy
Docking systems
Docking station - changing IO devices during operation (distributed I/O)
Configuring docking systems
Accelerating startup
Options for accelerating the startup of IO devices
Prioritized startup
Configuring prioritized startup
Optimize the port settings
Optimize the cabling of the ports
Measures in the user program
Dealing with timeouts while exchanging data
Terminating communication relation during faults
Enabling maintenance of the communication relation in the CPU properties
Enabling maintenance of the communication relation by data record transfer
Example: Transfer data record for behavior change via FB
PROFINET Security
Configuring the SNMP
Configuring DCP
PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system
PROFINET with the redundant S7-1500R/H system
Media redundancy in the redundant S7-1500R/H system
H-Sync Forwarding
System redundancy S2
System redundancy R1
Switched S1 device
Main differences between IO device with system redundancy S2, R1 and standard IO device
Installation guidelines
Configuring PROFINET IO on a redundant S7-1500R/H system
Assigning IO device to the redundant S7-1500R/H system
Configuring media redundancy (MRP) for a configuration with the redundant S7-1500R/H system
MRP interconnection with the redundant system S7-1500R/H
CM PtP - Configurations for point-to-point connections
Preface
Preface
Siemens Industry Online Support
Industry Mall
Security information
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Tool support (ET 200SP R1)
Introduction
Overview of the communication modules
Overview of the processing steps
Overview of instructions
Basics of serial communication
Serial data transmission
Transmission security
RS232 mode
RS422 mode
RS485 mode
Handshake procedure
Configuring / parameter assignment
Configuring / parameter assignment of a communication module
Special features for the use of the option for performance optimization
Communication using Freeport
Procedure for establishing a serial connection with Freeport
Data transmission with Freeport
Sending data with Freeport
Receiving data with Freeport
Code transparency
Receive buffer
Communication via DMX512
Communication using 3964(R)
Procedure for establishing a serial connection with 3964(R)
Data transmission with 3964(R) procedure
Control characters
Block check character
Sending data with 3964(R)
Receiving data with 3964(R)
Communication through Modbus RTU
Procedure for establishing a serial connection with Modbus RTU
Overview of modbus communication
Function Codes
Communication using USS
Procedure for establishing a serial connection with USS
Overview of USS communication
Overview of functions
Programming - communication using instructions
Overview of point-to-point programming
Overview of Modbus programming
Overview of USS programming
Instructions
Point-to-point
Overview of Freeport communication
Using the instructions
General parameters for Freeport operations
Port_Config: Configure PtP communication port
Send_Config: Configure PtP sender
Receive_Config: Configure PtP recipient
P3964_Config: Configuring the 3964(R) protocol
Send_P2P: Sending data
Using the BUFFER and LENGTH parameters for communication operations
Receive_P2P: Receiving data
Receive_Reset: Clear receive buffer
Signal_Get: Read status
Signal_Set: Set accompanying signals
Get_Features: Get extended functions
Set_Features: Set extended functions
Error messages
MODBUS (RTU)
Dependencies between library versions
Overview of the Modbus RTU communication
Modbus_Comm_Load: Configure communication module for Modbus
Modbus_Master: Communicate as Modbus master
Modbus_Slave
Modbus_Slave: Communicate as Modbus slave
Access to data areas in DBs instead of direct access to MODBUS addresses as of version V4.0
Restriction of read access to process images as of version V4.0
Frame structure
Error messages
USS
Dependencies between library versions
Overview of USS communication
Requirements for using the USS protocol
USS_Port_Scan / USS_Port_Scan_31: Communication by means of a USS network
USS_Drive_Control / USS_Drive_Control_31: Preparing and displaying data for the drive
USS_Read_Param / USS_Read_Param_31: Read data from drive
USS_Write_Param / USS_Write_Param_31: Change data in drive
General information on drive setup
Error messages
Startup and Diagnostics
Startup characteristics
Diagnostic functions
Diagnostic interrupts
Diagnostics via EventTracePtP data record
Data record EventTracePtP
Use and structure of EventTracePtP (data record 62)
CM PtP in operation without SIMATIC system instructions
Preface
Preface
Siemens Industry Online Support
Industry Mall
Security information
Documentation guide
Guide to documentation function manuals
Overview
Introduction
Basic information
Serial transmission of a character
Transmission security
Basic communication mechanisms
Data exchange types
Communication using data record (Universal)
Communication via user data (Performance option)
Data transmission with Freeport
Data transmission with Freeport
Sending data with Freeport
Receiving data with Freeport
Code transparency
Receive buffer
RS232 mode
RS422 mode
RS485 mode
Handshaking
Communication via DMX512
Data transmission with 3964(R)
Data transmission with 3964(R) protocol
Control characters
Block checksum
Sending data with 3964(R)
Receiving data with 3964(R)
Configuration data records
Freeport communication
Freeport communication
Port configuration record - data record 57
Send configuration record - data record 59
Receive configuration record - data record 60
3964 communication
3964 communication
Port configuration record - data record 57
3964 protocol configuration - data record 61
Activate special function - data record 58
Error status
Error status
Read error status - data record 55
Sending data
Sending data using data record
Flow chart for sending using data record
Send data - data record 48
Request acknowledgment - Input data
Example
Sending data via output data
Flow chart for sending using output data
Output data when using the Performance option
Request acknowledgment - Input data
Receiving data
Receiving data using data record
Flow chart for receiving using data record
Data received - data record 49/50
Query: New receive frame - Input data
Example
Receiving data via input data
Flow chart for receiving via input data
Input data when using the Performance option
Clear receive buffer
Clear receive buffer - data record 54
RS232 signals
Set RS232 secondary signals - data record 53
Read RS232 secondary signals - Input data
Error messages
Status and error messages
PtP Communication Instructions Used with Distributed I/O of an S7-300/400
Preface
Preface
Note on IT security
Documentation guide
Documentation guide
Introduction
Convention
Overview of instructions
Programming - communication using instructions
Point-to-point
Overview of Freeport communication
Using the instructions
General parameters for Freeport operations
Port_Config: Configure PtP communication port
Send_Config: Configure PtP sender
Receive_Config: Configure PtP recipient
P3964_Config: Configuring the 3964(R) protocol
Send_P2P: Sending data
Using LENGTH and BUFFER parameters in communication operations
Receive_P2P: Receiving data
Receive_Reset: Clear receive buffer
Signal_Get: Read status
Signal_Set: Set accompanying signals
Get_Features: Get extended functions
Set_Features: Set extended functions
Modbus
Overview of the Modbus RTU communication
Modbus_Comm_Load: Configure communication module for Modbus
Modbus_Master: Communicate as Modbus master
Modbus_Slave: Communicate as Modbus slave
Frame structure
USS
Overview of USS communication
Requirements for using the USS protocol
USS_Port_Scan: Communication by means of a USS network
USS_Drive_Control: Preparing and displaying data for the drive
USS_Read_Param: Read data from drive
USS_Write_Param: Change data in drive
General information on drive setup
Error messages
Error messages
Service & Support
Service & Support
MultiFieldbus
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
Guide to documentation function manuals
System overview
System overview
MultiFieldbus engineering
Detect active fieldbus
EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP functions
EtherNet/IP
Integration in the automation system
Overview
Configuring with MFCT
Requirements
Settings
Assigning network parameters
Resetting the MF device
Creating new MultiFieldbus project in MFCT
Open MultiFieldbus project in MFCT
Selecting a station
Configuring modules of a station
Configuring IO modules of a station
Parameter assignment of the station
Transfer the configuration
Sending user feedback
Configuration in the engineering system
Import EDS station description
Importing a user-defined type (UDT)
Configuring the MF device
I/O data mapping
Examples of I/O data mapping for coupler
Example of I/O data mapping for I/O data alignment Byte
Example of I/O data mapping for I/O data alignment Word
Configuring the module from the user program
Configuration as generic EtherNet/IP module
Diagnostics
Reading diagnostics via CIP EtherNet/IP
Reading diagnostics with MFCT
Reading hardware interrupt via CIP EtherNet/IP
PULL/PLUG event EtherNet/IP
Reading service data
Supported CIP objects for EtherNet/IP
Identity Object
Assembly Object
Connection Manager Object
TCP/IP Interface Object
EtherNet Link Object
LLDP Management Object
LLDP Data Table Object
Param Object
Modbus TCP
Modbus TCP functions
Modbus TCP
Integration in the automation system
Overview
Configuring with MFCT
Requirements
Settings
Assigning network parameters
Resetting the MF device
Creating new MultiFieldbus project in MFCT
Open MultiFieldbus project in MFCT
Selecting a station
Configuring a station
Parameter assignment of the station
Transfer the configuration
Sending user feedback
Configuration in the engineering system
Services
Register addresses
Behavior of the inputs and outputs
I/O data mapping
Data record interface
Overview
User interface
Read data record
Write data record
Example: Read I&M0 data
Example: Write I&M1 data
Example: Read diagnostics (multiple data packets)
Example: Write parameter data record (multiple data packets)
Diagnostics
Reading diagnostics with MFCT
Reading hardware interrupts via event interface
PULL/PLUG event modbus TCP
Reading service data
MF Shared Device
MF Shared Device
Configuration
Example
Firmware update with MFCT
Firmware update
Settings
Updating the firmware
Updating firmware in multiple subnets
Activating the firmware
MultiFieldbus Configuration Tool (MFCT)
Introduction
Introduction_New
Reference documents
Safety instructions
General security instructions
Industrial cybersecurity
Introduction to industrial cybersecurity
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Basic information on industrial cybersecurity
Definition of industrial cybersecurity
Objectives of industrial cybersecurity
Operational application environment and security measures
Intended use
Requirements for the operational environment and security measures
Security features of the MFCT
Secure operation of the MFCT
Introduction to secure operation of the MFCT
Security update notification
Hardening measures
Access control
Notifications about security vulnerabilities (Siemens Security Advisories)
Data backup
Secure uninstallation
Description
Area of application of the MFCT
Conditions for operating the MFCT
Operation with multiple subnets
Example of operating the MFCT with several subnets
Recommended settings for operating the MFCT
Software installation
Contents of the Software installation section
System requirements
Operating systems
Additional software components
Security programs
Virtualization platforms
Installation
Installation
Update the MFCT installation
Functions
Information on the "About" tab
"About" tab
Version information
User feedback
Overview of the "Settings"
"Settings" tab
General settings
Catalog
Plug-ins
MultiFieldbus configuration
Introduction
Creating new MultiFieldbus project in MFCT
Open MultiFieldbus project in MFCT
Selecting a station
Configuring a station
Parameterizing the station
Parameter assignment of the station
Parameterizing the I/O data alignment
Transfer the configuration
Exporting the configuration
Reading diagnostics
DALI configuration
DALI configuration
Selecting station with DALI module
Selecting and configuring a DALI module
Making color settings
Device types
Device types
Control gear
Device view
Group view
Input devices
Maintenance
Maintenance
Event information
Running light identification
Expert mode
Mass operation
Settings
TM FAST
TM FAST
Generating UPD and DB files
Download UPD files
SIWAREX
SIWAREX
Scanning for SIWAREX assemblies
Setting up communication in the station view
Working in the station view
Commissioning and monitoring
PtP Event Trace
PtP Event Trace
Selecting a station with CM PtP module
Analyzing a trace
Maintenance
Contents of the Maintenance section
"Assign parameters" tab
Overview of the "Assign parameters" tab
Assigning network parameters
Resetting to factory settings
Defining scan settings
"Read service data" tab
"Firmware update" tab
Overview of the "Firmware update" tab
Settings for firmware update
Settings for firmware update
Setting scanning options
Updating firmware
Activating the firmware
I/O function manuals
IO-Link system
Introduction
Introduction
Guide
Siemens Industry Online Support
SiePortal
System overview
System overview
Advantages of IO-Link
Overview of IO-Link system
IO-Link interface
IO-Link protocol
Device profiles
IODD and Port Configuration Tool - S7-PCT
Differences between IO-Link specifications V1.0 and V1.1
Integration into the automation system
Configuration of the IO-Link system
Configuration of the IO-Link system
Configuration with S7-PCT
Configuration without S7-PCT
Comparison of the configuration options
Data access of the automation system and the HMI device
Changing and saving device parameters during plant operation
Replacing a master or device during operation
Analog value processing
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
Documentation guide
What you should know about analog technology
Overview
Precision/resolution
Scaling analog values
Unscaling analog values
Linearity errors
Repeat accuracy
Operational and basic error limits
Temperature error
Interference frequency suppression
Common mode interference (UCM)
Series mode interference (USM)
Interference voltage suppression
Crosstalk between channels
Diagnostics
Value status
Conversion time of an analog module
Cycle time of an analog module
Settling and response times of analog output modules
Smoothing
Burden with 2-wire transducers
Representation of analog values
Overview
Representation of input ranges
Representation of output ranges
Connecting transducers
Overview
Wiring analog inputs with MANA connection
Wiring analog inputs without MANA connection
Wiring voltage transducers
Wiring current transducers
Wiring thermal resistors and resistors
Wiring thermocouples
Thermocouples
Selecting thermocouples
Structure and operating principle of thermocouples
Compensation for the reference junction temperature
Overview
Compensation with internal reference junction
Compensation with reference channel of the module
Compensation, reference channel of Group 0
Compensation with fixed reference temperature
Compensation by means of dynamic reference temperature
"None" or external compensation
Compensation type RTD (0)
Wiring loads/actuators
Overview
Wiring loads/actuators
Supported functions
Calibrating analog modules
Overview
Calibrating analog modules
Canceling a calibration
Resetting analog modules to factory settings
High-speed analog modules
Basics
ST modules vs HS modules
Designing interference-free controllers
Preface
Preface
Security information
Documentation guide
Documentation guide
Basic information on electromagnetic compatibility
Overview of possible interference
Coupling mechanisms
Interference-free cable routing
Introduction
Classifying cables into cable categories
Cable routing inside cabinets in buildings
Cable routing outside cabinets and inside buildings
Cable routing outside buildings
Underground cable routing
Bending radii and tensile strength of cables
Cable shielding
Cable shielding
Connecting the cable shielding for S7-1500 and ET 200MP
Connecting the cable shielding for ET 200SP
Connecting the cable shielding for ET 200AL
Connecting the cable shield for bus cables
Connecting the cable shield for other components
Equipotential bonding
Introduction to equipotential bonding
Special measures for interference-free operation
Lightning protection and overvoltage protection
What is lightning and overvoltage protection?
Lightning protection zone concept
Rules and components for the transitions between lightning protection zones
Technology function manuals
S7-1500/S7-1500T Motion Control Overview V10.0 as of STEP 7 V21
Introduction
Purpose, conventions and additional information
S7-1500 Motion Control Documentation Guide
S7-1500 Motion Control Documentation Guide
Function Manuals documentation guide
Information classes Function Manuals
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety instructions
General safety instructions
Warnings in this document
Industrial cybersecurity
Industrial cybersecurity (introduction)
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Overview of functions
Areas of application of S7-1500 Motion Control
Functions in STEP 7
Principle of operation of S7-1500 Motion Control
Description of technology objects
HW Configuration
Configuration limits
New features
New features V10.0
New general functions V10.0
New axis functions V10.0
New synchronous operation functions V10.0
New kinematics functions V10.0
New Interpreter functions V10.0
New features V9.0
New general functions V9.0
New axis functions V9.0
New synchronous operation functions V9.0
New kinematics functions V9.0
New Interpreter functions V9.0
New features V8.0
New general functions V8.0
New axis functions V8.0
New measuring input and output cam functions V8.0
New synchronous operation functions V8.0
New kinematics functions V8.0
Interpreter functions V8.0
New features V7.0
New general functions V7.0
New axis functions V7.0
New synchronous operation functions V7.0
New kinematics functions V7.0
Innovations V6.0
Innovations V5.0
Innovations V4.0
Innovations V3.0
Using versions
Overview of versions
Replacing devices
Upgrade technology version
Upgrade to technology version V10.0
Upgrading to technology version V9.0
Upgrading to technology version V8.0
Upgrading to technology version V7.0
Upgrade to technology version V3.0 to V6.0
Technology versions V1.0 and V2.0
Configuring
Basics on the configuration of technology objects
Add technology object
Copy technology object
Delete technology object
Group technology objects
Working with the configuration editor
Toolbar of the configuration
Compare values
Working with the parameter view
Introduction to the parameter view
Structure of the parameter view
Toolbar of the parameter view
Navigation
Parameter table
Opening the parameter view
Working with the parameter view
Overview
Filtering the parameter table
Sorting the parameter table
Indicating errors
Editing start values in the project
Monitoring values online in the parameter view
Modifying values
Comparing values
Configuring technological modules and onboard I/O for Motion Control
Overview
TM Count 1x24V/TM Count 2x24V
TM PosInput 1/TM PosInput 2
TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V/TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V
TM Pulse 2x24V
TM PTO 2x24V
TM PTO 4
CPU 1511C-1 PN/CPU 1512C-1 PN (onboard I/O devices)
SIMATIC Drive Controller (onboard I/O)
Motion Control configurations on CPUs with two IRT interfaces
Programming
Introduction
Process response
Organization blocks for Motion Control
Process image partition "OB Servo PIP"
Operational Sequence and Timeouts
Operating modes
Improving system performance for motion jobs
Technology data block
Introduction
Evaluating the technology data block
Evaluate StatusWord, ErrorWord and WarningWord
Change restart-relevant data
Motion Control instructions
Motion Control instruction parameters
Add Motion Control instructions
Parameter transfer for function blocks
Starting Motion Control jobs
Tracking active jobs
Introduction
Motion Control instructions with "Done" parameter
Motion Control instructions without "Done" parameter
Ending Motion Control jobs
Restart of technology objects
Data types
Downloading to CPU
Download to CPU
Diagnostics
Introduction to diagnostics
Recording and diagnostics of events with the trace
Brief description of event recording
Representation of the event recording in the time diagram
Recordable events
Guide to using the event recording
Activating event recording in the trace configuration
Filtering events
Displaying details of a recorded event
Navigating to the call of a Motion Control job
S7-1500/S7-1500T Axis functions V10.0 as of STEP 7 V21
Introduction
Purpose, conventions and additional information
S7-1500 Motion Control Documentation Guide
S7-1500 Motion Control Documentation Guide
Function Manuals documentation guide
Information classes Function Manuals
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety instructions
General safety instructions
Warnings in this document
Industrial cybersecurity
Industrial cybersecurity (introduction)
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
New features V10.0
New axis functions V10.0
Overview of functions
Speed axis technology object
Positioning axis technology object
Synchronous axis technology object
External encoder technology object
Motion control instructions for axis control
Extended functions of the technology CPU
Functions in STEP 7
Axis functions
Configuring basic parameters
Configure axis type
Configure the type of an external encoder
Units of measure
Modulo setting
Virtual axis
Actual value calculation with the virtual axis
Axis in simulation
Actual value calculation for the axis in simulation
Drive and encoder connection
Short description of drive and encoder connection
Adding and configuring drives
Introduction
Adding and configuring a PROFINET IO drive
Adding and configuring a PROFIBUS DP drive
Configuring PROFIdrive telegrams
Connecting PROFIdrive drives
Connecting PROFIdrive drive directly
Connecting a PROFIdrive drive via data block
Connect drive/encoder via data block
Configuring drive parameters manually
Connecting encoders via PROFIdrive
Introduction to encoder connection
Connecting the encoder directly
Connect encoder via data block
Configuring the encoder type
Configuring encoder parameters manually
Using multiple encoders
Calculate actual velocity from actual speed NIST_B from PROFIdrive telegram
Transferring drive and encoder parameters automatically
Connecting stepper motors
Connecting drives with analog setpoint interface
Connecting force/torque data via SIEMENS additional telegram 750
Encoder signal output via TM41
Tags: Drive and encoder connection
Safety functions in the drive
Brief description of the Safety functions
Safe stopping process
Safe brake control
Safe monitoring of motion
Safe monitoring of position
Overview of safety-oriented functions
Mechanics
Short description of the mechanics
Configuring the mechanics of the speed axis
Configuring the mechanics of the positioning axis/synchronous axis
Configuring the mechanics of the external encoder
Configuring drive and encoder direction for positioning axis/synchronous axis
Configuring the load gear
Configuring the encoder gear
Configuring the leadscrew pitch
Backlash compensation
Configure inertia values
Tags: Mechanics
Enabling a technology object
Brief description of enabling a technology object
Enabling a technology object with the Motion Control instruction "MC_Power"
Tags: Enabling a technology object
Acknowledging technology alarms and reinitializing the technology object
Brief description of acknowledging technology alarms and reinitializing the technology object
Acknowledging technology alarms
Restart of technology object
Motion control and dynamic limits
Short description of motion control and dynamic limits
Configuring dynamic defaults
Limiting the dynamics
Velocity or speed override
Interaction of dynamic defaults, override and dynamic limits
Dynamic defaults for modulo axes
Velocity profile
Override response with and without jerk limitation
Emergency stop deceleration
Torque limits
Force/torque limiting
Fixed stop detection
Additive setpoint torque/additive setpoint force
Permissible torque range/force range
Superimposed motion
Brief description of superimposed motion
Superimposed positioning motion with "MC_MoveSuperimposed"
Halting a superimposed motion
Tags: Motion control and limits for dynamics
Axis movements
Brief description of axis movements
Moving axis with constant velocity
Absolute or relative positioning of an axis
Defining the motion transition
Moving an axis relatively or absolutely with a time-based position profile
Jogging an axis
Stopping motions
Brief description of stopping motions
Disabling the technology object
Brief description of disabling the technology object
Disabling the technology object with emergency deceleration ("StopMode" = 0)
Disabling a technology object with fast stop ("StopMode" = 1)
Disabling a technology object with maximum dynamic values ("StopMode" = 2)
Disabling a technology object with coast down ("StopMode" = 3)
Disabling of the technology object in case of alarm responses
Brief description of disabling in case of an alarm response
Disabling of the technology object with the alarm response "Remove enable"
Disabling of the technology object in case of alarm responses with braking ramp
Stopping a technology object
Short description of stopping a technology object
Stopping a technology object with "MC_Halt"
Stopping a technology object with "MC_Stop" and preventing new motion jobs
Override behavior between alarm responses and "MC_Stop"
Tags: Stopping motions
Traversing range limitation
Options for limiting the traversing range
Behavior when approaching and retracting a HW limit switch
Configuring HW limit switches
Interconnecting inputs for HW limit switches with Boolean tags
Behavior when reaching the SW limit switch
Retracting the SW limit switch
Configuring SW limit switches
Tags: Traversing range limitation
Long-term accuracy
Homing
Short description of homing
Terms for active and passive homing
Homing mode for active and passive homing
Active homing
Active homing with reference output cam and zero mark
Active homing with zero mark
Active homing with digital input
Direction reversal at the hardware limit switch (reversing output cam)
Active homing to a hardware limit switch
Passive homing
Passive homing with reference cam and zero mark
Passive homing with zero mark
Passive homing with digital input
Cancel passive homing
Direct homing
Direct homing
Set setpoint position
Set position setpoint
Absolute value adjustment
Save data on the SIMATIC Memory Card
Incremental encoder adjustment
Homing SINAMICS drives with external zero marks
Homing when backlash compensation is enabled
Resetting the "Homed" status
Tags: Homing
Position monitoring functions
Short description of position monitoring
Positioning monitoring
Following error monitoring
Standstill signal
Tags: Position monitoring functions
Configuring a control loop
Short description of closed-loop control
Position control in the drive with Dynamic Servo Control (DSC)
Position control in the PLC
Configuring position controller for drives with DSC
Configuring position controller in the PLC
Configuring the torque precontrol
Dynamic filter
Brief description of dynamic filter
Dynamic filter as PT1 or PT2 filter
Dynamic response as sliding window demand filter
Switching the position control off and on
Tags: Closed-loop control
Motion specification via "MotionIn"
Brief description of "MotionIn"
Specifying velocity and acceleration
Specifying the position, velocity and acceleration
Superimposed "MotionIn" motion
Brief description of superimposed motion
Specifying superimposed motion setpoints with "MC_MotionInSuperimposed"
Specifying superimposed motion setpoints from another axis
Halting a superimposed motion
Stopping the "MotionIn" instructions
Tags: Motion specification with "MotionIn"
Commissioning
Introduction
Commissioning guidelines
Take over master control and enable axis
Operator controls for jogging, homing and positioning
Specify the dynamics in the axis control panel
Homing with the axis control panel
Traversing the axis with the axis control panel
Optimize position controller
Disable axis and hand over master control
Diagnostics
Introduction to diagnostics
Speed-controlled axis technology object
Status and error bits
Motion status
PROFIdrive telegram
Positioning axis technology object
Status and error bits
Motion status
PROFIdrive telegram
Technology object external encoder
Status and error bits
Motion status
PROFIdrive telegram
Instructions
MC_Power V10
MC_Power: Enable, disable technology object V10
MC_Power: Function chart V10
MC_Reset V10
MC_Reset: Acknowledge alarms, restart technology object V10
MC_Home V10
MC_Home: Home technology object, set home position V10
MC_Home: "MC_Home.Mode" parameter V10
MC_Halt V10
MC_Halt: Stop axis V10
MC_Halt: Function chart V10
MC_MoveAbsolute V10
MC_MoveAbsolute: Position axis absolutely V10
MC_MoveAbsolute: Function chart V10
MC_MoveRelative V10
MC_MoveRelative: Position axis relatively V10
MC_MoveRelative: Function chart V10
MC_PositionProfile V10
MC_PositionProfile: Move axis via a time-based position profile V10
MC_PositionProfile: Function chart V10
MC_MoveVelocity V10
MC_MoveVelocity: Move axis with velocity/speed setpoint V10
MC_MoveVelocity: Function chart V10
MC_MoveJog V10
MC_MoveJog: Move axis in jog mode V10
MC_MoveJog: Function chart V10
MC_MoveSuperimposed V10
MC_MoveSuperimposed: Position axis overlapping V10
MC_MoveSuperimposed: Function chart V10
MC_HaltSuperimposed V10
MC_HaltSuperimposed: Pause superimposed motions on axis V10
MC_HaltSuperimposed: Function chart V10
MC_SetSensor V10
MC_SetSensor: Switch alternative encoder to operative encoder V10
MC_Stop V10
MC_Stop: Stop axis and prevent new motion jobs V10
MC_Stop: Function chart V10
MC_SetAxisSTW V10
MC_SetAxisSTW: Control bits of control word 1 and 2 V10
MC_WriteParameter V10
MC_WriteParameter: Write parameter V10
MC_SaveAbsoluteEncoderData V10
MC_SaveAbsoluteEncoderData: Save absolute encoder adjustment for device replacement V10
MotionIn
MC_MotionInVelocity V10
MC_MotionInVelocity: Specify motion setpoints V10
MC_MotionInVelocity: Function chart V10
MC_MotionInPosition V10
MC_MotionInPosition: Specify motion setpoints V10
MC_MotionInPosition: Function chart V10
MC_MotionInSuperimposed V10
MC_MotionInSuperimposed: Specify superimposed motion setpoints V10
MC_MotionInSuperimposed: Function chart V10
MC_MotionInSuperimposedAxes V10
MC_MotionInSuperimposedAxes: Specify superimposed motion setpoints from another axis V10
MC_MotionInSuperimposedAxes: Function chart V10
Torque data
MC_TorqueAdditive V10
MC_TorqueAdditive: Specify additive torque V10
MC_TorqueAdditive: Function chart V10
MC_TorqueRange V10
MC_TorqueRange: Set high and low torque limit V10
MC_TorqueRange: Function chart V10
MC_TorqueLimiting V10
MC_TorqueLimiting: Activate/deactivate force/torque limit / fixed stop detection V10
MC_TorqueLimiting: Function chart V10
Override response of Motion Control jobs V10
Override response V10: Homing and motion jobs
Override response V10: Synchronous operation jobs
Override response V10: Measuring input jobs
Override response V10: Kinematics motion commands
Override response V10: Interpreter jobs
Tags of the technology object data blocks
Legend
Legend
Tags of the speed axis technology object
Actual values and setpoints (speed axis)
"Simulation" tag (speed axis)
"VirtualAxis" tag (speed axis)
"Actor" tag (speed axis)
"TorqueLimiting" tag (speed axis)
"LoadGear" tag (speed axis)
"Units" tag (speed axis)
"DynamicLimits" tag (speed axis)
"DynamicDefaults" tag (speed axis)
"Override" tag (speed axis)
"StatusDrive" tag (speed axis)
"StatusTorqueData" tag (speed axis)
"StatusMotionIn" tag (speed axis)
"StatusInterpreterMotion" tag (speed axis)
"StatusWord" tag (speed axis)
"StatusWord2" tag (speed axis)
"ErrorWord" tag (speed axis)
"ErrorDetail" tag (speed axis)
"WarningWord" tag (speed axis)
"ControlPanel" tag (speed axis)
"InternalToTrace" tag (speed axis)
Tags of the positioning axis technology object
Actual values and setpoints (positioning axis)
"Simulation" tag (positioning axis)
"VirtualAxis" tag (positioning axis)
"Actor" tag (positioning axis)
"TorqueLimiting" tag (positioning axis)
"Clamping" tag (positioning axis)
Sensor[1..4] tags (positioning axis)
"CrossPlcSynchronousOperation" tag (positioning axis)
"Extrapolation" tag (positioning axis)
"LoadGear" tag (positioning axis)
"Properties" tag (positioning axis)
"Units" tag (positioning axis)
"Mechanics" tag (positioning axis)
"Modulo" tag (positioning axis)
"DynamicLimits" tag (positioning axis)
"DynamicDefaults" tag (positioning axis)
"PositionLimits_SW" tag (positioning axis)
"PositionLimits_HW" tag (positioning axis)
"Homing" tag (positioning axis)
"Override" tag (positioning axis)
"PositionControl" tag (positioning axis)
"TorquePreControl" tag (positioning axis)
"SetpointFilter" tag (positioning axis)
"DynamicAxisModel" tag (positioning axis)
"FollowingError" tag (positioning axis)
"PositioningMonitoring" tag (positioning axis)
"StandstillSignal" tag (positioning axis)
"StatusPositioning" tag (positioning axis)
"StatusDrive" tag (positioning axis)
"StatusServo" tag (positioning axis)
"StatusProvidedLeadingValue" tag (positioning axis)
StatusSensor[1..4] Tags (positioning axis)
"StatusExtrapolation" tag (positioning axis)
"StatusKinematicsMotion" tag (positioning axis)
"StatusTorqueData" tag (positioning axis)
"StatusMotionIn" tag (positioning axis)
"StatusInterpreterMotion" tag (positioning axis)
"StatusWord" tag (positioning axis)
"StatusWord2" tag (positioning axis)
"ErrorWord" tag (positioning axis)
"ErrorDetail" tag (positioning axis)
"WarningWord" tag (positioning axis)
"ControlPanel" tag (positioning axis)
"InternalToTrace" tag (positioning axis)
Tags of the technology object external encoder
Actual values (external encoder)
"Sensor" tag (external encoder)
"CrossPlcSynchronousOperation" tag (external encoder)
"Extrapolation" tag (external encoder)
"LoadGear" tag (external encoder)
"Properties" tag (external encoder)
"Units" tag (external encoder)
"Mechanics" tag (external encoder)
"Modulo" tag (external encoder)
"Homing" tag (external encoder)
"StandstillSignal" tag (external encoder)
"StatusProvidedLeadingValue" tag (external encoder)
"StatusSensor" tag (external encoder)
"StatusExtrapolation" tag (external encoder)
"StatusWord" tag (external encoder)
"ErrorWord" tag (external encoder)
"ErrorDetail" tag (external encoder)
"WarningWord" tag (external encoder)
"InternalToTrace" tag (external encoder)
Appendix
Signal flow diagrams position control
Signal flow diagrams position control
S7-1500/S7-1500T Measuring input and output cam functions V10.0 as of STEP 7 V21
Introduction
Purpose, conventions and additional information
S7-1500 Motion Control Documentation Guide
S7-1500 Motion Control Documentation Guide
Function Manuals documentation guide
Information classes Function Manuals
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety instructions
General safety instructions
Warnings in this document
Industrial cybersecurity
Industrial cybersecurity (introduction)
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Overview of functions
Measuring input technology object
Output cam technology object
Cam track technology object
Motion Control instructions
Functions in STEP 7
Configuring the technology object
Assignment
Units of measure
Measuring input functions
Defining the measurement input for measured value acquisition
Overview of measurement inputs and measuring types
Measuring using Timer DI
Measuring via SINAMICS (central measuring probe)
Measuring using PROFIdrive telegram
Measuring via "Monitor measuring input"
Defining the correction time for the measurement time
Type of measurement
Defining the measuring range
Measuring once
Cyclic measuring
Cancel active measuring job
Time-related boundary conditions
Tags: Measuring input technology object
Output cam functions
Defining the output cam type
Output cam type
Configuring the distance output cam
Configuring the time-based output cam
Configuring the output cam reference
Configuring the output cam output
Activate/deactivate output cam output
Configuring output by Timer DQ
Configuring output by digital module
Outputting multiple output cams to one output
Defining the activation time and deactivation time
Configuring a hysteresis
Inverted output
How distance output cams work
Defining the effective direction of distance output cams
Activating/deactivating the distance output cam
Defining the switching behavior of distance output cams
Hysteresis behavior of distance output cams
How time-based output cams work
Defining the effective direction of time-based output cams
Activating/deactivating a time-based output cam
Defining the switching behavior of time-based output cams
Hysteresis behavior of time-based output cams
Tags: Output cam technology object
Cam track functions
Configuring the cam track
Defining the cam track reference
Configuring the cam track output
Activate/deactivate cam track output
Configuring output by Timer DQ
Configuring output by digital module
Masking of individual output cams of a cam track
Defining cam track data
Time offset of output cam switching points
Configuring a hysteresis
Defining the track length
Defining the axis reference position
Configuring output cam data
Activate/deactivate cam track
Processing of a cam track
Processing of a cam track
Effective direction of distance output cams on a cam track
Effective direction of time-based output cams on a cam track
Homing of an axis or an encoder during cam track processing
Changing the cam track data during operation
Tags: Cam track technology object
Diagnostics
Introduction to diagnostics
Measuring input technology object
Status and error bits
Output cam technology object
Status and error bits
Cam track technology object
Status and error bits
Cam track status
Instructions
MC_MeasuringInput V10
MC_MeasuringInput: Start measuring once V10
MC_MeasuringInput: Function chart V10
MC_MeasuringInputCyclic V10
MC_MeasuringInputCyclic: Start cyclic measuring V10
MC_MeasuringInputCyclic: Function chart V10
MC_AbortMeasuringInput V10
MC_AbortMeasuringInput: Cancel active measuring job V10
MC_OutputCam V10
MC_OutputCam: Activate/deactivate output cam V10
MC_OutputCam: Function chart V10
MC_CamTrack V10
MC_CamTrack: Activate/deactivate cam track V10
MC_CamTrack: Function chart V10
Override response of Motion Control jobs V10
Override response V10: Homing and motion jobs
Override response V10: Synchronous operation jobs
Override response V10: Measuring input jobs
Override response V10: Kinematics motion commands
Override response V10: Interpreter jobs
Tags of the technology object data blocks
Legend
Legend
Tags of the measuring input technology object
Display data (measuring input)
"Parameter" tag (measuring input)
"Interface" tag (measuring input)
"Units" tag (measuring input)
"MeasuredValues" tag (measuring input)
"StatusWord" tag (measuring input)
"ErrorWord" tag (measuring input)
"ErrorDetail" tag (measuring input)
"WarningWord" tag (measuring input)
Tags of the output cam technology object
Display data (output cam)
"Parameter" tag (output cam)
"Interface" tag (output cam)
"Units" tag (output cam)
"StatusWord" tag (output cam)
"ErrorWord" tag (output cam)
"ErrorDetail" tag (output cam)
"WarningWord" tag (output cam)
Tags of the cam track technology object
Display data (cam track)
"Parameter" tag (cam track)
"Interface" tag (cam track)
"Units" tag (cam track)
"StatusWord" tag (cam track)
"ErrorWord" tag (cam track)
"ErrorDetail" tag (cam track)
"WarningWord" tag (cam track)
S7-1500/S7-1500T synchronous operation functions V10.0 as of STEP 7 V21
Introduction
Purpose, conventions and additional information
S7-1500 Motion Control Documentation Guide
S7-1500 Motion Control Documentation Guide
Function Manuals documentation guide
Information classes Function Manuals
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety instructions
General safety instructions
Warnings in this document
Industrial cybersecurity
Industrial cybersecurity (introduction)
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
New features V10.0
New synchronous operation functions V10.0
Upgrade to technology version V10.0
Overview of functions
Function overview of synchronous operation
Synchronous axis technology object
Cam technology object
Leading axis proxy technology object
Motion Control instructions for synchronous operation
Mode of operation of the instructions in synchronous operation
Preparing synchronous operation
Creating technology objects
Defining leading value interconnection
Interconnecting the leading value
Setpoint coupling
Actual value coupling and actual value extrapolation
Tags: Actual value extrapolation
Configuring the reverse tolerance of the leading value
Position control in synchronous operation
Gearing
Gearing with "MC_GearIn"
Brief description of gearing
Defining gear ratio
Dynamic limits of the following axis in gearing with "MC_GearIn"
Synchronizing following axis using dynamic parameters with "MC_GearIn"
Synchronous travel in gearing with "MC_GearIn"
Gearing with "MC_GearInPos"
Brief description of gearing with specified synchronous position
Defining gear ratio
Dynamic limits of the following axis in gearing with "MC_GearInPos"
Synchronizing gearing
Parameter overview for synchronizing with "MC_GearInPos"
Defining direction of synchronization with "MC_GearInPos"
Synchronizing following axis in advance using dynamic parameters with "MC_GearInPos"
Synchronizing following axis in advance using leading value distance with "MC_GearInPos"
Subsequent synchronizing of following axis using leading value distance with "MC_GearInPos"
Subsequent synchronization of following axis using leading axis distance starting at current leading value position with calculated synchronous position of the following axis with "MC_GearInPos"
Subsequent synchronization of following axis using leading value distance with calculated synchronous position of the following axis with "MC_GearInPos"
Synchronous travel in gearing with "MC_GearInPos"
Leading value offset during gearing
Leading value offset on the following axis during gearing using dynamic parameters
Leading value offset on the following axis during gearing using leading value distance as of current leading value position
Leading value offset on the following axis during gearing using leading value distance as of specific leading value position
Defining the direction of the leading value distance of a leading value offset on the following axis during gearing
Canceling a pending leading value offset in the gearing
Following value offset during gearing
Following value offset on the following axis during gearing using leading value distance as of current leading value position
Following value offset on the following axis during gearing using leading value distance as of specific leading value position
Defining the direction of the leading value distance of a following value offset on the following axis during gearing
Canceling a pending following value offset in the gearing
Desynchronizing gearing
Desynchronizing following axis using dynamic parameters with "MC_GearOut"
Desynchronizing following axis using leading value distance with "MC_GearOut"
Defining direction of desynchronization with "MC_GearOut"
Dynamic limits of the following axis during desynchronization with "MC_GearOut"
Canceling pending gearing with "MC_GearOut"
Tags: Gearing
Velocity synchronous operation
Brief description velocity synchronous operation
Defining gear ratio
Specify gear ratio once or dynamically
Defining position control of the following axis
Dynamic limits of the following axis in velocity synchronous operation
Synchronizing following axis using dynamic parameters with "MC_GearInVelocity"
Synchronous travel in velocity synchronous operation with "MC_GearInVelocity"
Tags: Velocity synchronous operation
Camming
Camming with "MC_CamIn"
Configuring the synchronous operation function of the cam
Structure and operation of the cam editor
Structure and operation of the cam editor
Structure of the graphical editor
Shortcut menu in the graphical editor
Structure of the tabular editor
Shortcut menu in the tabular editor
Operating the cam editor
Configure the profile and display of the cam
Properties and display in the inspector window
Configuration of profile - General
Configuration of profile - Effective runtime curves
Profile configuration - Range scaling
Configuration of profile - Check
Configuration charts - Charts and curves
Configuration charts - Snap grid
Configuration - Decimal places
Inserting and configuring cam elements
Inserting and configuring a point
Inserting and configuring a point group
Inserting and configuring the line
Inserting and configuring a sine
Inserting and configuring a polynomial
Inserting and configuring an inverse sine
Inserting elements from the clipboard
Move elements
Scale elements
Deleting elements
Show elements used
Transferring the synchronous operation function of the cam to the technology object data block
Exporting cam
Importing a cam
Changing the synchronous operation function of the cam online
Changing the synchronous operation function of the cam online - short description
Changing the synchronous operation function of the cam manually
Copy calculated cam elements
Creating the synchronous operation function of the cam with the "LCamHdl" library
Transferring the synchronous operation function of the cam defined online to the offline project
Interpolating a cam
Configuring transitions
System interpolation
Interpolation according to VDI Guideline 2143
Interpolate cam with "MC_InterpolateCam"
Scaling and shifting cam
Scaling a cam range
Defining application mode of the cam
Dynamic limits of the following axis in camming
Synchronizing camming
Parameter overview for synchronizing with "MC_CamIn"
Defining direction of synchronization with "MC_CamIn"
Synchronizing following axis in advance using dynamic parameters with "MC_CamIn"
Synchronizing following axis in advance using leading value distance with "MC_CamIn"
Synchronizing following axis in advance via the leading value path from the current leading value position with "MC_CamIn"
Subsequent synchronizing of following axis using leading value distance with "MC_CamIn"
Subsequent synchronizing of following axis using leading axis value starting from the current leading value position with "MC_CamIn"
Directly set following axis synchronously with "MC_CamIn"
Directly set following axis synchronously at end of the cam with "MC_CamIn"
Directly set the following axis synchronously at specific leading value position with "MC_CamIn"
Synchronous travel in camming with "MC_CamIn"
Reading out leading and following values during camming
Reading the leading value in camming
Reading the following value in camming
Reading out the following value cyclically during camming
Leading value offset during camming
Leading value offset on the following axis during camming using leading value distance as of current leading value position
Leading value offset on the following axis during camming using leading value distance as of specific leading value position
Defining the direction of the leading value distance of a leading value offset on the following axis during camming
Canceling a pending leading value offset in the camming
Following value offset during camming
Following value offset on the following axis during camming using leading value distance as of current leading value position
Following value offset on the following axis during camming using leading value distance as of specific leading value position
Defining the direction of the leading value distance of a following value offset on the following axis during camming
Canceling a pending following value offset in the camming
Desynchronize camming
Desynchronizing following axis using dynamic parameters with "MC_CamOut"
Desynchronizing following axis using leading value distance with "MC_CamOut"
Defining direction of desynchronization with "MC_CamOut"
Dynamic limits of the following axis during desynchronization with "MC_CamOut"
Canceling pending camming with "MC_CamOut"
Tags: Camming
Other synchronous operation functions
Simulate synchronous operation
Brief description of simulating synchronous operation
Tags: Synchronous operation is being simulated
Specify additive leading value
Brief description of specifying the additive leading value
Tags: Additive leading value
Cross-PLC synchronous operation
Brief description of cross-PLC synchronous operation
Time response in cross-PLC synchronous operation
Compatible versions for synchronous operation across PLCs
Preparing cross-PLC synchronous operation
Communication via direct data exchange
Cross-PLC synchronous operation with direct data exchange
Setting up communication via direct data exchange
Cascaded interconnection with direct data exchange
Communication via PN/PN coupler
Cross-PLC synchronous operation with PN/PN coupler
Set communication via PN/PN coupler
Cascaded interconnection with PN/PN coupler
Communication using isochronous I-device
Cross-PLC synchronous operation with isochronous I-device
Setting up communication using an isochronous I-device
Cascaded interconnection with isochronous I-device
Configuring the provision of leading value and interconnecting axes
Configuring the tolerance time
Working with the interconnection overview table
Opening the interconnection overview
Interconnection overview
Showing routes
Setting the delay times
Example: Analyze cross-PLC synchronous operation in various projects using the trace and instruction "GetPNWorkingClock"
Tags: Cross-PLC synchronous operation
Diagnostics
Introduction to diagnostics
Synchronous axis technology object
Status and error bits
Motion status
PROFIdrive telegram
Cam technology object
Applications of the cam diagnostics
Structure of the diagnostics
Online view
Status and error bits
Range scaling
"Definition changed" and "Interpolated" status bits
Filter by segments and points
Comparing elements
Managing snapshots
Exporting and importing snapshots
Printing curve diagram
Leading axis proxy technology object
Status and error bits
Motion status
Instructions
Synchronous motion
MC_GearIn V10
MC_GearIn: Start gearing V10
MC_GearIn: Function chart V10
MC_GearInPos V10
MC_GearInPos: Start gearing with specified synchronous positions V10
MC_GearInPos: Function chart V10
MC_GearInVelocity V10
MC_GearInVelocity: Start velocity synchronous operation V10
MC_GearInVelocity: Function chart V10
MC_PhasingRelative V10
MC_PhasingRelative: Relative shift of leading value on the following axis V10
MC_PhasingRelative: Function chart V10
MC_PhasingAbsolute V10
MC_PhasingAbsolute: Absolute shift of leading value on the following axis V10
MC_PhasingAbsolute: Function chart V10
MC_OffsetRelative V10
MC_OffsetRelative: Relative shift of following value on the following axis V10
MC_OffsetRelative: Function chart V10
MC_OffsetAbsolute V10
MC_OffsetAbsolute: Absolute shift of following value on the following axis V10
MC_OffsetAbsolute: Function chart V10
MC_CamIn V10
MC_CamIn: Start camming V10
MC_CamIn: Function chart V10
MC_SynchronizedMotionSimulation V10
MC_SynchronizedMotionSimulation: Simulate synchronous operation V10
MC_GearOut V10
MC_GearOut: Desynchronize gearing V10
MC_GearOut: Function chart V10
MC_CamOut V10
MC_CamOut: Desynchronize camming V10
MC_CamOut: Function chart V10
MC_LeadingValueAdditive V10
MC_LeadingValueAdditive: Specify additive leading value V10
MC_LeadingValueAdditive: Function chart V10
Cam
MC_InterpolateCam V10
MC_InterpolateCam: Interpolate cam V10
MC_GetCamLeadingValue V10
MC_GetCamLeadingValue: Read out leading value of a cam V10
MC_GetCamFollowingValue V10
MC_GetCamFollowingValue: Read out following value of a cam V10
MC_GetCamFollowingValueCyclic V10
MC_GetCamFollowingValueCyclic: Cyclically read out following value of a cam V10
MC_CopyCamData V10
MC_CopyCamData: Copy calculated cam elements V10
MC_SetCamRangeScaling V10
MC_SetCamRangeScaling: Scaling the cam range V10
MC_SetCamRangeScaling: Function chart V10
Override response of Motion Control jobs V10
Override response V10: Homing and motion jobs
Override response V10: Synchronous operation jobs
Override response V10: Measuring input jobs
Override response V10: Kinematics motion commands
Override response V10: Interpreter jobs
Tags of the technology object data blocks
Legend
Legend
Tags of the synchronous axis technology object
Actual values and setpoints (synchronous axis)
"Simulation" tag (synchronous axis)
"VirtualAxis" tag (synchronous axis)
"Actor" tag (synchronous axis)
"TorqueLimiting" tag (synchronous axis)
"Clamping" tag (synchronous axis)
"Sensor[1..4]" tags (synchronous axis)
"CrossPlcSynchronousOperation" tag (synchronous axis)
"Extrapolation" tag (synchronous axis)
"SynchronizedMotion" tag (synchronous axis)
"LoadGear" tag (synchronous axis)
"Properties" tag (synchronous axis)
"Units" tag (synchronous axis)
"Mechanics" tag (synchronous axis)
"Modulo" tag (synchronous axis)
"DynamicLimits" tag (synchronous axis)
"DynamicDefaults" tag (synchronous axis)
"PositionLimits_SW" tag (synchronous axis)
"PositionLimits_HW" tag (synchronous axis)
"Homing" tag (synchronous axis)
"Override" tag (synchronous axis)
"PositionControl" tag (synchronous axis)
"TorquePreControl" tag (synchronous axis)
"SetpointFilter" tag (synchronous axis)
"DynamicAxisModel" tag (synchronous axis)
"FollowingError" tag (synchronous axis)
"PositioningMonitoring" tag (synchronous axis)
"StandstillSignal" tag (synchronous axis)
"StatusPositioning" tag (synchronous axis)
"StatusDrive" tag (synchronous axis)
"StatusServo" tag (synchronous axis)
"StatusProvidedLeadingValue" tag (synchronous axis)
"StatusSensor[1..4]" tags (synchronous axis)
"StatusExtrapolation" tag (synchronous axis)
"StatusSynchronizedMotion" tag (synchronous axis)
"StatusKinematicsMotion" tag (synchronous axis)
"StatusTorqueData" tag (synchronous axis)
"StatusMotionIn" tag (synchronous axis)
"StatusInterpreterMotion" tag (synchronous axis)
"StatusWord" tag (synchronous axis)
"StatusWord2" tag (synchronous axis)
"ErrorWord" tag (synchronous axis)
"ErrorDetail" tag (synchronous axis)
"WarningWord" tag (synchronous axis)
"ControlPanel" tag (synchronous axis)
"InternalToTrace" tag (synchronous axis)
Tags of the cam technology object
"Point[1..i]" tag (cam)
"ValidPoint[1..i]" tag (cam)
"Segment[1..i]" tag (cam)
"ValidSegment[1..i]" tag (cam)
"InterpolationSettings" tag (cam)
"StatusCam" tag (cam)
"StatusRangeScaling" Tag (cam)
"StatusWord" tag (cam)
"ErrorWord" tag (cam)
"ErrorDetail" tag (cam)
"WarningWord" tag (cam)
Tags of the leading axis proxy technology object
Leading value (leading axis proxy)
"Interface" tag (leading axis proxy)
"Parameter" tag (leading axis proxy)
"StatusExternalLeadingValue" tag (leading axis proxy)
"StatusWord" tag (leading axis proxy)
"'ErrorWord" tag (leading axis proxy)
"ErrorDetail" tag (leading axis proxy)
"WarningWord" tag (leading axis proxy)
S7-1500T Kinematics functions V10.0 as of STEP 7 V21
Introduction
Purpose, conventions and additional information
S7-1500 Motion Control Documentation Guide
S7-1500 Motion Control Documentation Guide
Function Manuals documentation guide
Information classes Function Manuals
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety instructions
General safety instructions
Warnings in this document
Industrial cybersecurity
Industrial cybersecurity (introduction)
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
New features V10.0
New kinematics functions V10.0
Overview of functions
Kinematics systems for handling tasks
Kinematics technology object with up to 4 interpolating kinematics axes
Motion control instructions for kinematics control
Functions in STEP 7
Configuration limits for kinematics systems
S7-1500T Motion Control KinPlus
Product description "S7-1500T Motion Control KinPlus"
Kinematics technology object with more than 4 interpolating kinematics axes
SIMATIC Memory Card S7-1500T Motion Control KinPlus
Mapping kinematics in the project
Term definition
Legend for representation of the kinematics
Coordinate systems and frames
Coordinate systems and frames
Kinematics types with up to four interpolating kinematics axes
Kinematics types with more than four kinematics axes
Supported kinematics types
Units of measure
Configuring and interconnecting kinematics axes
Brief description
Configuring kinematics axes
Brief description
Modulo setting
Axis in simulation/virtual axis
Interconnecting kinematics axes
Mechanical axis coupling
Mechanical axis coupling for kinematics types with up to four interpolating kinematics axes.
Mechanical axis coupling for kinematics types with more than four interpolating kinematics axes
Tags: Mechanical axis coupling
Joints
Joint coordinate system (JCS)
Configuring joints
Configuring joints
Inverting the joint direction
Define joint traversing range
Monitoring of the joint traversing range
Defining an offset
Tags: Joints
Kinematics types
Cartesian portal
Cartesian portal 2D
Cartesian portal 2D with orientation
Cartesian portal 3D
Cartesian portal 3D with orientation
Cartesian portal 3D with 2 orientations A, B
Tags: Cartesian portal
Roller picker
Roller picker 2D
Roller picker 2D with orientation
Roller picker 3D (vertical)
Roller picker 3D with orientation (vertical)
Roller picker 3D with orientation (horizontal)
Tags: Roller picker
SCARA
SCARA 2D with orientation
SCARA 3D with orientation
Tags: SCARA
Articulated arm
Articulated arm 2D
Articulated arm 2D with orientation
Articulated arm 3D
Articulated arm 3D with orientation
6-axis articulated arm with central wrist
6-axis articulated arm with offset wrist
Tags: Articulated arm
Delta picker
Delta picker 2D
Delta picker 2D with orientation
Delta picker 3D
Delta picker 3D with orientation
Delta picker 3D with 2 orientations A, B
Permissible joint position for delta picker
Tags: Delta picker
Cylindrical robot
Cylindrical robot 3D
Cylindrical robot 3D with orientation
Tags: Cylindrical robot
Tripod
Tripod 3D
Tripod 3D with orientation
Tags: Tripod
User-defined kinematics systems
Brief description of user-defined kinematics
Tags: User-defined kinematics systems
Kinematics transformation
Brief description of the kinematics transformation
Transformation for predefined kinematics systems
Reference points
Traversing range and transformation area
Joint position spaces (kinematics-dependent)
Singularities
Transformation for user-defined kinematics systems
User transformation without JCS
User transformation with JCS
MC_Transformation [OB98]
Program example for a user-defined kinematics systems
Tags: Kinematics transformation
Kinematics functions
Offset and rotation of the coordinate system
Brief description of offset and rotation
Define KCS/OCS frame
Define tool frames
Tags: Coordinate systems and frames
Zone monitoring
Brief description of zone monitoring
Defining zones
Structure of the "Zones" configuration window
Defining workspace zones
Defining kinematics zones
Defining a zone number for a zone
Defining the zone type for a workspace zone
Defining a reference coordinate system for a zone
Defining the zone geometry
Defining the offset and rotation in the reference coordinate system
Activating zone monitoring
Deactivating zone monitoring
Zone violation
Retracting after a zone violation
Tags: Zone monitoring
Overview of kinematics motions
Brief description of overview of kinematics motions
Introduction to the programming of the kinematics motions
Define target position
Motion status and remaining distance
Interrupting, continuing and stopping kinematics motions
Interaction of kinematics motions and single axis motions
Tags: Kinematics motions
Motion dynamics
Dynamic settings and dynamic limits
Considering dynamics in path planning
Defining dynamic limits at the kinematics axes
Defining dynamic limits at the kinematics technology object
Configuring dynamics for the kinematics and the orientation motion
Configuring dynamics for the sPTP motion
Dynamic adaptation
Preparing dynamics at the motion job
Display of currently effective dynamic limits
Override
Motion preparation using multiple jobs
Job sequence
Blending kinematics motions with maximum rounding clearance
Dynamic behavior when motions are appended/blended
Preliminary motion preparation
Setting the motion preparation
Moving a kinematics in a linear manner
Brief description of linear motion
Defining the target position of the linear motion
Defining the dynamic response of the linear motion
Defining the transition of linear motion
Starting a linear motion job
Tags: Linear motion
Moving a kinematics in a circular manner
Brief description of circular motion
Defining the circular path of the circular motion
Defining the circular path via intermediate point and target position
Defining the circular path via center point and angle
Define circular path via radius and target position
Define the dynamic response of the circular motion
Define the transition of circular motion
Starting a circular motion job
Tags: Circular motion
Moving a kinematics with a synchronous "point-to-point" motion
Brief description of synchronous "point-to-point" motion
Defining the target position of the sPTP motion
Defining the axis target position of the sPTP motion
Define joint target positions of the sPTP motion
Defining the Cartesian target coordinates of the sPTP motion
Defining the dynamics factors of the sPTP motion
Defining the transition of the sPTP motion
Starting the sPTP motion job
Tags: sPTP motion
Conveyor Tracking
Brief description of conveyor tracking
Configuring and starting conveyor tracking
Phases of conveyor tracking
Behavior of the "TrackingState" tag
Motion between two tracked OCS
Dynamics in the phases of the conveyor tracking
Dynamics in the phases of the conveyor tracking
Dynamic adaptation during conveyor tracking
Dynamic reserve
Stopping behavior with "MC_GroupStop" and "MC_GroupInterrupt"
Blending behavior
Set kinematics to simulation mode
Brief description of setting kinematics to simulation mode
Starting simulation mode
Ending simulation mode
Tags: Kinematics to simulation
Setting a tool to active
3D visualization
Brief description 3D visualization
Structure of the 3D visualization
Working with the 3D display
Operating the zone display
Operating the directional pad
Monitoring and comparing position values
Commissioning
Brief description of commissioning
Control panel status
Taking over master control and enabling kinematics
Selecting an active tool
Operator controls for jogging and homing
Setting the home position of a kinematics axis
Active homing of the kinematics axis
Specifying dynamics in the kinematics control panel
Jogging the kinematics
Jogging the kinematics
Jogging the kinematics axes in the MCS
Jogging joints in the JCS
Cartesian kinematics jogging in WCS/OCS
Disabling kinematics and handing over master control
Diagnostics
Introduction to diagnostics
Kinematics technology object
Structure of the diagnostics
Status and error bits
Zones status
Motion and tools
Positions
Kinematics trace
Brief description of kinematics trace
Defining parameter values for recording
List of recordings
Recording and playing kinematics motions
Saving and deleting recordings
Importing and exporting recordings
Calibration
Brief description of calibration
Using 3D display for the calibration
Configuring the calibration
Moving the kinematics for calibration
Display progress and status
Setting points
Apply or reset values
Calibrate object coordinate systems
Configuring calibration of an object coordinate system
Move OCS with the "Two-point" calibration method
Move OCS and rotate around the y axis
Move OCS with the "One-point" calibration method
Move OCS and rotate around one axis or two axes
Move OCS and rotate around the z axis
Examples
Introduction
Move OCS 1
Move OCS 1 and rotate around the y axis
Move OCS 1 and rotate around z axis
Move OCS 1 and rotate it around the z axis and y axis
Calibrate workspace zones
Configuring calibration of a workspace zone
Calibrate cuboid zone with corner points
Calibrate cylindrical zone with surface line
Calibrate cylindrical zone with circular plane
Calibrate spherical zone with diameter
Calibrate spherical zone with radius
Instructions
Kinematics motions
MC_GroupInterrupt V10
MC_GroupInterrupt: Interrupt motion execution V10
MC_GroupContinue V10
MC_GroupContinue: Continue motion execution V10
MC_GroupContinue: Function chart V10
MC_GroupStop V10
MC_GroupStop: Stop motion V10
MC_GroupStop: Function chart V10
MC_MoveLinearAbsolute V10
MC_MoveLinearAbsolute: Position kinematics with linear path motion V10
MC_MoveLinearAbsolute: Function chart V10
MC_MoveLinearRelative V10
MC_MoveLinearRelative: Relative positioning of kinematics with linear path motion V10
MC_MoveLinearRelative: Function chart V10
MC_MoveCircularAbsolute V10
MC_MoveCircularAbsolute: Position kinematics with circular path motion V10
MC_MoveCircularAbsolute: Function chart V10
MC_MoveCircularRelative V10
MC_MoveCircularRelative: Relative positioning of kinematics with circular path motion V10
MC_MoveCircularRelative: Function chart V10
MC_MoveDirectAbsolute V10
MC_MoveDirectAbsolute: Absolute movement of kinematics with synchronous "point-to-point" motion V10
MC_MoveDirectAbsolute: Function chart V10
MC_MoveDirectRelative V10
MC_MoveDirectRelative: Relative movement of kinematics with synchronous "point-to-point" motion V10
MC_MoveDirectRelative: Function chart V10
MC_TrackConveyorBelt V10
MC_TrackConveyorBelt: Start conveyor tracking V10
MC_TrackConveyorBelt: Function chart V10
MC_KinematicsMotionSimulation V10
MC_KinematicsMotionSimulation: Start/end simulation of kinematics V10
Zones
MC_DefineWorkspaceZone V10
MC_DefineWorkspaceZone: Define workspace zone V10
MC_DefineKinematicsZone V10
MC_DefineKinematicsZone: Define kinematics zone V10
MC_SetWorkspaceZoneActive V10
MC_SetWorkspaceZoneActive: Activate workspace zone V10
MC_SetWorkspaceZoneInactive V10
MC_SetWorkspaceZoneInactive: Deactivate workspace zone V10
MC_SetKinematicsZoneActive V10
MC_SetKinematicsZoneActive: Activate kinematics zone V10
MC_SetKinematicsZoneInactive V10
MC_SetKinematicsZoneInactive: Deactivate kinematics zone V10
Tools
MC_DefineTool V10
MC_DefineTool: Redefine tool V10
MC_SetTool V10
MC_SetTool: Change active tool V10
Coordinate systems
MC_SetOcsFrame V10
MC_SetOcsFrame: Redefine object coordinate systems V10
MC_KinematicsTransformation V10
MC_KinematicsTransformation: Convert axis coordinates to Cartesian coordinates V10
MC_InverseKinematicsTransformation V10
MC_InverseKinematicsTransformation: Convert Cartesian coordinates to axis coordinates V10
Override response of Motion Control jobs V10
Override response V10: Homing and motion jobs
Override response V10: Synchronous operation jobs
Override response V10: Measuring input jobs
Override response V10: Kinematics motion commands
Override response V10: Interpreter jobs
Tags of the technology object data blocks
Legend
Legend
Tags of the kinematics technology object
"Tcp" tag (kinematics)
"Kinematics" tag (kinematics)
"KcsFrame" tag (kinematics)
"OcsFrame[1..3]" tag (kinematics)
"Tool[1..3]" tag (kinematics)
"DynamicDefaults" tag (kinematics)
"DynamicLimits" tag (kinematics)
"Joint" tag (kinematics)
"AxisCoupling" tag (kinematics)
"MotionQueue" tag (kinematics)
"Transition" tag (kinematics)
"Override" tag (kinematics)
"Conveyor" variable (kinematics)
"WorkspaceZone[1..10]" tag (kinematics)
"KinematicsZone[2..10]" tag (kinematics)
"StatusPath" tag (kinematics)
"TcpInWcs" tag (kinematics)
"TcpInOcs[1..3]" tag (kinematics)
"StatusOcsFrame[1..3]" tag (kinematics)
"StatusKinematics" tag (kinematics)
"AxesData" tag (kinematics)
"JointData" tag (kinematics)
"FlangeInKcs" tag (kinematics)
"StatusTool" tag (kinematics)
"StatusConveyor[1..3]" tag (kinematics)
"StatusWorkspaceZone[1..10]" tag (kinematics)
"StatusKinematicsZone[2..10]" tag (kinematics)
"StatusZoneMonitoring" tag (kinematics)
"StatusMotionQueue" tag (kinematics)
"KinematicsAxis" tag (kinematics)
"Units" tag (kinematics)
"StatusInterpreterMotion" tag (kinematics)
"StatusWord" tag (kinematics)
"ErrorWord" tag (kinematics)
"ErrorDetail" tag (kinematics)
"WarningWord" tag (kinematics)
"ControlPanel" tag (kinematics)
"InternalToTrace" tag (kinematics)
S7-1500/S7-1500T Motion Control alarms and error detection V10.0 as of STEP 7 V21
Introduction
Purpose, conventions and additional information
S7-1500 Motion Control Documentation Guide
S7-1500 Motion Control Documentation Guide
Function Manuals documentation guide
Information classes Function Manuals
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety instructions
General safety instructions
Warnings in this document
Industrial cybersecurity
Industrial cybersecurity (introduction)
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Diagnostics concept
Diagnostics concept
Technology alarms
Short description of technology alarms
Overview of the technology alarms
Technology alarms 101 - 114
Technology alarm 101
Technology alarm 102
Technology alarm 103
Technology alarm 104
Technology alarm 105
Technology alarm 106
Technology alarm 107
Technology alarm 108
Technology alarm 109
Technology alarm 110
Technology alarm 111
Technology alarm 112
Technology alarm 113
Technology alarm 114
Technology alarms 201 - 204
Technology alarm 201
Technology alarm 202
Technology alarm 203
Technology alarm 204
Technology alarms 301 - 343
Technology alarm 301
Technology alarm 304
Technology alarm 305
Technology alarm 306
Technology alarm 307
Technology alarm 308
Technology alarm 321
Technology alarm 322
Technology alarm 323
Technology alarm 341
Technology alarm 342
Technology alarm 343
Technology alarms 401 - 431
Technology alarm 401
Technology alarm 411
Technology alarm 412
Technology alarm 421
Technology alarm 431
Technology alarms 501 - 563
Technology alarm 501
Technology alarm 502
Technology alarm 503
Technology alarm 504
Technology alarm 511
Technology alarm 521
Technology alarm 522
Technology alarm 531
Technology alarm 533
Technology alarm 534
Technology alarm 541
Technology alarm 542
Technology alarm 550
Technology alarm 551
Technology alarm 552
Technology alarm 561
Technology alarm 562
Technology alarm 563
Technology alarms 601 - 612
Technology alarm 601
Technology alarm 603
Technology alarm 608
Technology alarm 612
Technology alarms 700 - 758
Technology alarm 700
Technology alarm 701
Technology alarm 702
Technology alarm 703
Technology alarm 704
Technology alarm 750
Technology alarm 752
Technology alarm 753
Technology alarm 754
Technology alarm 755
Technology alarm 758
Technology alarms 801 - 820
Technology alarm 801
Technology alarm 802
Technology alarm 803
Technology alarm 804
Technology alarm 805
Technology alarm 806
Technology alarm 807
Technology alarm 808
Technology alarm 809
Technology alarm 810
Technology alarm 811
Technology alarm 812
Technology alarm 820
Technology alarms 900 - 903
Technology alarm 900
Technology alarm 901
Technology alarm 902
Technology alarm 903
Technology alarms 1001 - 1012
Technology alarm 1001
Technology alarm 1002
Technology alarm 1003
Technology alarm 1004
Technology alarm 1005
Technology alarm 1006
Technology alarm 1007
Technology alarm 1008
Technology alarm 1009
Technology alarm 1010
Technology alarm 1011
Technology alarm 1012
Error IDs in Motion Control instructions
Short description of error IDs in Motion Control instructions
Error IDs 16#0000 - 16#800F
Error IDs 16#8010 - 16#801F
Error IDs 16#8020 - 16#802F
Error IDs 16#8030 - 16#803F
Error IDs 16#8040 - 16#804F
Error IDs 16#8050 - 16#805F
Error IDs 16#8060 - 16#806F
Error IDs 16#8070 - 16#807F
Error IDs 16#8080 - 16#808F
Error IDs 16#80A0 - 16#80AF
Error IDs 16#80B0 - 16#80BF
Error IDs 16#80C0 - 16#80CF
Error IDs 16#80D0 - 16#80DF
Error IDs 16#80E0 - 16#80EF
Error IDs 16#80F0 - 16#80FE
Error IDs 16#8110 - 16#8121
Error detection 16#8130 - 16#813F
Error IDs 16#8200 - 16#82FF
Error IDs 16#8FF0 - 16#8FFF
Counting, measurement and position detection
Preface
Preface
SiePortal
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Tool support
Industrial Cybersecurity
Security information
The basics of counting, measurement and position detection
Overview of modules and properties
Basics of counting, measuring and position input (TM Count, TM PosInput, Compact CPU)
Convention
Overview of applications
Recording of count signals
Counting with incremental or pulse encoder
Position input with SSI absolute encoder
Behavior at the counting limits
Gate control with incremental or pulse encoder
Gate functions
Software gate
Hardware gate
Internal gate
Counter behavior at gate start
Capture (Latch)
Capture with incremental or pulse encoder
Capture with SSI absolute encoder
Synchronization
Synchronization
Synchronization by digital input
Synchronization at signal N
Comparison values
Comparison values and outputs
Switching at comparison values with counter value as reference
Switching at comparison values with position value (SSI absolute value) as reference
Switching at comparison values with measured value as reference
Measured value determination
Overview of measuring functions
Measured value determination with incremental or pulse encoder
Measuring ranges
Measuring intervals
Measuring types
Measured value determination with SSI absolute encoder
Measuring ranges
Measuring intervals
Measuring types
Hysteresis
Hysteresis with incremental or pulse encoder
Hysteresis with SSI absolute encoder
Interrupts
Position detection for Motion Control
Encoder signals
24 V or TTL count signals
RS422 count signals
SSI signals
Signal evaluation of incremental signals
Overview
Single evaluation
Double evaluation
Quadruple evaluation
Clock synchronization (TM Count and TM PosInput)
Basics of counting (TM Timer DIDQ)
Overview of applications
Counting with incremental encoder
Counting with pulse encoder
24 V count signals
Isochronous mode
Basics of counting (digital modules)
Overview of applications
Counting with pulse encoders
Behavior at the counting limits
Gate control
Gate functions
Software gate
Hardware gate
Internal gate
Counting once with hardware gate
Comparison values
Interrupts
24 V count signals
Isochronous mode
Counting once with direction setting via digital input
Basics of counting (SIMATIC Drive Controller)
Overview of applications
Event counter
Period duration measurement
Isochronous mode
Using the High_Speed_Counter technology object
Convention
High_Speed_Counter technology object
Overview of the configuration steps
Add technology object
Configuring the High_Speed_Counter
Working with the configuration dialog
Basic parameters
Counter inputs (High_Speed_Counter)
Counter behavior
Counting limits and start value
Counter behavior at limits and gate start
Behavior of a DI (High_Speed_Counter)
Behavior of a DQ (High_Speed_Counter)
Specify measured value (High_Speed_Counter)
Programming the High_Speed_Counter
High_Speed_Counter instruction
Call instruction in the user program
Description High_Speed_Counter
High_Speed_Counter input parameters
High_Speed_Counter output parameters
High_Speed_Counter static variables
Error codes of parameter ErrorID
Commissioning the High_Speed_Counter
Commissioning the technology object
High_Speed_Counter diagnostics
Monitoring counter values, measured values, DIs and DQs
Using the SSI_Absolute_Encoder technology object
Technology object SSI_Absolute_Encoder
Overview of the configuration steps
Add technology object
Configuring SSI_Absolute_Encoder
Working with the configuration dialog
Basic parameters
SSI absolute encoder
Behavior of a DI (SSI_Absolute_Encoder)
Behavior of a DQ (SSI_Absolute_Encoder)
Specify measured value (SSI_Absolute_Encoder)
Examples of the frame format
Programming the SSI_Absolute_Encoder
Instruction SSI_Absolute_Encoder
Call instruction in the user program
Description SSI_Absolute_Encoder
Input parameter SSI_Absolute_Encoder
Output parameter SSI_Absolute_Encoder
Static tags SSI_Absolute_Encoder
Error codes of parameter ErrorID
Commissioning SSI_Absolute_Encoder
Commissioning the technology object
SSI_Absolute_Encoder diagnostics
Monitoring counter values, measured values, DIs and DQs
Using the module
Using the technology module
Convention
Configuring a module
Adding a technology module for hardware configuration (TM Count and TM PosInput)
Adding a technology module to hardware configuration (Compact CPU)
Adding a technology module to the hardware configuration (ET 200eco PN TM PosInput 2)
Open hardware configuration
Parameter assignment options
Basic parameters
Activate channel (ET 200eco PN TM PosInput 2)
Reaction to CPU STOP
Diagnostic interrupts (TM Count, TM PosInput, EM)
Diagnostics interrupts (Compact CPU)
Operating mode
Module parameters (position input for Motion Control)
Hardware interrupts
Additional parameters for Compact CPU
Introduction
Compatibility 1511C (high-speed counters of Compact CPU 1512C-1 PN)
General
Hardware inputs/outputs
Manual operation (incremental or pulse encoder)
Counter inputs
Counting limits and start value
Counter behavior at limits and gate start
Behavior of a DI
Behavior of a DQ
Specifying the measured value
Manual operation (SSI absolute encoder)
Counter inputs
Behavior of a DI
Behavior of a DQ
Specifying the measured value
Fast Mode (incremental or pulse encoder)
Counter inputs
Counting limits and start value
Counter behavior at limits and gate start
Behavior of a DI
Behavior of a DQ
Fast Mode (SSI absolute encoder)
Counter inputs
Behavior of a DI
Behavior of a DQ
Online & diagnostics module
Displaying and evaluating diagnostics
Control and feedback interface (TM Count, TM PosInput)
Use of control and feedback interface
Assignment of the control interface
Notes on the control interface
Assignment of the feedback interface
Notes on the feedback interface
Using the digital module
Configuring and assigning parameters to the module
Adding a module to the hardware configuration
Open hardware configuration
Counting operating mode
Online & diagnostics module
Displaying and evaluating diagnostics
Using SIMATIC Drive Controller
Configuration and parameter assignment of SIMATIC Drive Controller
Adding the SIMATIC Drive Controller to the hardware configuration
Open hardware configuration
Event/period duration measurement operating mode
Online & diagnostics module
Displaying and evaluating diagnostics
SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming
Important notes
Important notes
Cybersecurity information
SiePortal
Product Overview
Overview
Hardware and Software Components
Installing/uninstalling the STEP 7 Safety Advanced V21 license
Migrating projects from S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 to STEP 7 Safety Advanced
Migrating PLC programs to a n F-CPU S7-1500
Upgrading projects to the latest version of STEP 7 Safety
Upgrading projects
Upgrading projects from STEP 7 Safety as of V14 SP1 to the latest version
First steps
Configuring
Overview of Configuration
Peculiarities when configuring fail-safe GSD based DP slaves and fail-safe GSD based I/O devices
Configuring an F-CPU
Configuring an F-CPU
Special features of the S7-1500 F Virtual Controller
Special considerations when configuring an S7-1500 F Virtual Controller on a (virtual) Edge Device (IE(V)D)
Operating the S7-1500 F Virtual Controller without central Virtual Timeservice
Operating the S7-1500 F Virtual Controller with central Virtual Timeservice
Configuring F-I/O
Configuration control (option handling) for F-I/Os
Configuration control (option handling) for F-I/Os
Example
Configuring shared device
Configuring isochronous mode (S7-1200 G2, S7-1500)
Recommendation for PROFIsafe address assignment
Configurations supported by the SIMATIC Safety F-system
PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 1
PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 2
PROFIsafe addresses for F-I/O of PROFIsafe address type 3
Setting the F-destination address for F-I/O with DIP switches
Assigning a PROFIsafe address of the F-I/Os with SIMATIC Safety
Introduction
Identifying F-modules
Assign PROFIsafe address
Assigning PROFIsafe address to an F-module in a shared device in multiple projects
Assigning PROFIsafe address to an F-module in a shared device in a common project
Changing the PROFIsafe address
Safety Administration Editor
Safety Administration Editor
Opening the Safety Administration Editor
"General" area of the Safety Administration Editor
"F-runtime group" area of the Safety Administration Editor
"F-runtime group" area
Pre-/postprocessing (S7-1200, S7-1500)
"F-blocks" area of the Safety Administration Editor
"F-compliant PLC data types" area of the Safety Administration Editor (S7-1200, S7-1500)
"Web server F-admins" area of the Safety Administration Editor (S7-1200 G1, S7-1500)
"Settings" area of the Safety Administration Editor
"Flexible F-Link" area of the Safety Administration Editor (S7-1200, S7-1500)
Access protection
Introduction to access protection
Overview of access protection
Access protection for the safety-related project data
Access protection for the safety-related project data
CPU-wide access protection for the safety-related project data
Project-wide access protection for the safety-related project data
Access protection for the F-CPU
Access protection for the F-CPU
Access protection through the use of protection levels
Access protection through user management
Access protection through organizational measures
Programming
Overview of Programming
Overview of Programming
Program structure of the safety program (S7-300, S7-400)
Program structure of the safety program (S7-1200, S7-1500)
Safety program in Software Unit (Safety Unit) (S7-1500)
Fail-Safe Blocks
Restrictions in the programming languages FBD/LAD
F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) (S7-1200, S7-1500)
F-compliant PLC data types (UDT) (S7-1200, S7-1500)
Grouping PLC tags for inputs and outputs of F-I/O in structures (S7-1200, S7-1500)
Example of structured PLC tags for inputs and outputs of F-I/O (S7-1200, S7-1500)
Named value data types (S7-1500)
Editing PLC tags with external editors
Using Multiuser engineering
Deleting the safety program
Defining F-Runtime Groups
Rules for F-Runtime Groups of the Safety Program
Procedure for defining an F‑runtime group (S7-300, S7-400)
Procedure for defining an F‑runtime group (S7-1200, S7-1500)
F-runtime group communication (S7-300, S7-400)
F-runtime group communication (S7-1200, S7-1500)
Deleting an F-runtime group
Changing the F-runtime group (S7-300, S7-400)
Changing the F-runtime group (S7-1200, S7-1500)
Creating F-blocks
Creating F-blocks
Know-how protection
Reuse of F-blocks
Information interface to the safety program
F-shared DB (S7-300, S7-400)
F-runtime group information DB (S7-1200, S7-1500)
Programming startup protection
F-I/O access
Introduction
Addressing F-I/O
Value status (S7-1200, S7-1500)
Process Data or Fail-Safe Values
F‑I/O DB
F‑I/O DB
Name and number of the F‑I/O DB
Tags of the F-I/O DB
Tags of the F-I/O DB
PASS_ON
ACK_NEC
ACK_REI
IPAR_EN
DISABLE
QBAD/PASS_OUT/DISABLED/QBAD_I_xx/QBAD_O_xx and value status
ACK_REQ
IPAR_OK
DIAG
BASEID_ACTIVE
Accessing tags of the F-I/O DB
Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O
Passivation and reintegration of F-I/O
After startup of F-system
After communication errors
After F-I/O or channel faults
Group passivation
F-I/O access via I-slave-slave communication (S7-300, S7-400)
Overview
Configuring Safety‑Related I‑Slave-Slave Communication
Safety-related I-slave-slave communication - F-I/O access via process image
Limits for data transfer of safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication
Implementation of user acknowledgment
Implementing User Acknowledgment in the Safety Program of the F-CPU of a DP Master or IO controller
Implementing user acknowledgment in the safety program of the F-CPU of a I-slave or I-device
Data exchange between standard user program and safety program
Data exchange between standard user program and safety program
Data Transfer from the Safety Program to the Standard User Program
Data Transfer from Standard User Program to Safety Program
Safety-related communication
Communication via SENDDP/RCVDP or SENDS7/RCVS7(S7-300, S7-400) instructions:
Overview
Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication
Configure safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication
Program safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication
Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication - Limits for data transfer
Safety-related master-master communication
Configure safety-related master-master communication
Program safety-related master-master communication
Safety‑related master‑master communication:Limits for data transfer
Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication
Configuring safety-related communication between IO controller and I-device
Programming safety-related IO controller I-device communication
Safety-related IO-Controller-IO-Device communication - Limits for data transfer
Safety-related master-I-slave communication
Configuring safety-related master-I-slave communication
Program the safety-related master-I-slave or I-slave-I-slave communication
Limits for data transfer of safety-related master-I-slave or I-slave-I-slave communication
Safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication
Configure safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication
Programming safety‑related I‑slave-I‑slave communication
Limits for data transfer of safety-related I-slave-I-slave communication
Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication
Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication
Safety-related communication via S7 connections
Configuring safety-related communication via S7 connections
Programming safety-related communication via S7 connections
Safety‑related communication via S7 connections - Limits of data transfer
Safety-related communication with other S7 F-systems
Introduction
Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via PN/PN coupler (IO controller-IO controller communication)
Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via DP/DP coupler (master-master communication)
Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via S7 connections
Communication with S7 F/FH Systems via S7 connections
Communication via SENDDP/RCVDP instructions (S7-1200, S7-1500):
Overview
Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication
Configure safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication
Program safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication
Safety-related IO controller-IO controller communication - Limits for data transfer
Safety-related master-master communication
Configure safety-related master-master communication
Program safety-related master-master communication
Safety‑related master‑master communication:Limits for data transfer
Safety-related IO controller-I-device communication
Configuring safety-related communication between IO controller and I-device
Programming safety-related IO controller I-device communication
Safety-related IO-Controller-IO-Device communication - Limits for data transfer
Safety-related master-I-slave communication
Configuring safety-related master-I-slave communication
Programming safety‑related master-I‑slave communication
Limits for data transfer of safety-related master-I-slave communication
Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication
Safety-related IO controller-I-slave communication
Safety-related communication to S7 F-System S7 Distributed Safety
Introduction
Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via PN/PN coupler (IO controller-IO controller communication)
Communication with S7 Distributed Safety via DP/DP coupler (master-master communication)
Communication via SENDDP/RCVDP instructions between S7-300/400 and S7-1200/1500 F-CPUs
Overview
Communication via SENDDP/RCVDP instructions: IO controller and I-device in different projects
Configuring safety-related communication between IO controller and I-device
Programming safety-related IO Controller I-device communication
Communication with OPC UA Safety (S7-1500)
Introduction
Configuration and programming interfaces
Interfaces
Safety Parameter Interface (SPI) of the SafetyProvider
Safety Application Program Interface (SAPI) of the SafetyProvider
Safety Parameter Interface (SPI) of the SafetyConsumer
Safety Application Program Interface (SAPI) of the SafetyConsumer in the F-OPC UA Consumer DB
Other variables in the F-OPC UA Consumer DB
Configuring and programming a SafetyProvider
Creating a SafetyProvider
Preparing the Safety program (or standard user program) for creation of an OPC UA SafetyProvider information model
Creating an OPC UA SafetyProvider information model for an individual data structure
Creating a server interface for an OPC UA SafetyProvider information model
Programming the initialization or evaluation of SAPI parameters in your safety program (or standard user program)
Configuring and programming a SafetyConsumer
Configuring and programming a SafetyConsumer
Creating a client interface for an OPC UA SafetyProvider information model
Configuring properties of a SafetyConsumer
Programming the initialization or evaluation of SAPI parameters in your Safety program (or standard user program)
Programming underlying OPC UA communication ("client instructions") using the F-OPC UA Consumer Com FB
Special use cases for communication with OPC UA Safety
Introduction
Safety Multicast
Series machines
Changing communication partners
Avoiding connection resource bottlenecks
Using diagnostic options when communicating with OPC UA Safety
Using diagnostic options when communicating with OPC UA Safety
ReadSafetyDiagnostics
SafetyConsumerType
Configuring and programming a SafetyConsumerType
Creating an OPC UA SafetyConsumerType information model
Creating a server interface for an OPC UA SafetyConsumerType information model
Communication with Flexible F-Link (S7-1200, S7-1500)
Flexible F-Link
F-communication DB (S7-1200, S7-1500)
Compiling and commissioning a safety program
Compiling the safety program
Safety program work memory requirements (S7-300, S7-400)
Downloading project data
Downloading project data to an F-CPU
Downloading project data to an S7-300/400 F-CPU
Downloading project data to an S7-300/400 F-CPU with memory card inserted (SIMATIC Micro memory card or flash card)
Downloading project data to an S7-400 F-CPU without flash card inserted
Downloading individual F-blocks to an S7-300/400 F-CPU
Downloading project data to a memory card and inserting at an F-CPU S7-300/400
Downloading project data into an F-CPU S7-1200
Downloading project data to an S7-1200 F-CPU without program card inserted
Downloading project data to an S7-1200 F-CPU with program card inserted
Loading project data of an F-CPU S7-1200 with a transfer card into the internal load memory
Downloading project data of an S7-1200 F-CPU from the internal load memory to an empty SIMATIC Memory Card
Downloading project data to a SIMATIC Memory Card and inserting it at an F-CPU S7-1200
Downloading project data to an S7-1500 F-CPU
Downloading project data to an S7-1500 F-CPU
Downloading project data into a redundant S7-1500HF system
Downloading project data to an S7-1500 F Software Controller
Downloading project data to a SIMATIC Memory Card or removable storage device and inserting it into an F-CPU S7-1500
Restoring a backup of the safety program to an F-CPU
Specifics on creating and installing an image file of an S7-1500 F Software Controller
Loading project data (including safety-related project data) from an F-CPU into a PG/PC (S7-1500/S7-1200 G2 V4.1)
Loading project data (including safety-related project data) from a memory card into a PG/PC (S7-1500/S7-1200 G2 V4.1)
Loading a PC system configuration file for S7-1500 F software controllers
Loading PC station via the configuration file
Creating a configuration file
Importing the configuration file
Importing the configuration file
Import via the PC Station Panel menu (only possible with firmware < V30.0)
Import by means of a script
Program identification
Comparing Safety Programs
Creating a safety summary
Testing the safety program
Overview of Testing the Safety Program
Disabled safety mode
Disabling safety mode
Configuring the time limit for disabled safety mode (S7-1200, S7-1500)
Disabling safety mode
Testing the safety program
Testing the Safety program with S7-PLCSIM/S7-PLCSIM Advanced
Changing the safety program in RUN mode (S7-300, S7-400)
Safety program in RUN mode (S7-1200, S7-1500)
F-change history
System acceptance
Overview of System Acceptance
Correctness of the safety program including hardware configuration (including testing)
Completeness of the safety summary
Compliance of the system library elements used in the safety program with Annex 1 of the Report for the TÜV certificate
Compliance of the know-how protected F-blocks used in the Safety program with their safety summary.
Completeness and correctness of the hardware configuration
Completeness and correctness of safety-related communication
Completeness and correctness of safety-related communication
Completeness and correctness of safety-related communication
Procedure to check the correctness of the configuration of communication with OPC UA Safety
Identity of online and offline program
Other characteristics
Acceptance of Changes
Operation and maintenance
Notes on startup of the F-system
Notes on Safety Mode of the Safety Program
Replacing Software and Hardware Components
PFDavg and PFH values
Guide to Diagnostics
STEP 7 Safety V21 instructions
Overview of instructions
Connection of the Enable input EN and Enable output ENO
Temporal blurring for instructions with time processing
General
LAD
New network (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Empty box (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Open branch (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Close branch (STEP 7 Safety V21)
FBD
New network (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Empty box (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Open branch (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Insert binary input (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Invert RLO (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Bit logic operations
LAD
---| |---: Normally open contact (STEP 7 Safety V21)
---| / |---: Normally closed contact (STEP 7 Safety V21)
--|NOT|--: Invert RLO (STEP 7 Safety V21)
---( )---: Assignment (STEP 7 Safety V21)
---( R )---: Reset output (STEP 7 Safety V21)
---( S )---: Set output (STEP 7 Safety V21)
SR: Set/reset flip-flop (STEP 7 Safety V21)
RS: Reset/set flip-flop (STEP 7 Safety V21)
--|P|--: Scan operand for positive signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V21)
--|N|--: Scan operand for negative signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V21)
P_TRIG: Scan RLO for positive signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V21)
N_TRIG: Scan RLO for negative signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V21)
FBD
AND logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V21)
OR logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V21)
X: EXCLUSIVE OR logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V21)
=: Assignment (STEP 7 Safety V21)
R: Reset output (STEP 7 Safety V21)
S: Set output (STEP 7 Safety V21)
SR: Set/reset flip-flop (STEP 7 Safety V21)
RS: Reset/set flip-flop (STEP 7 Safety V21)
P: Scan operand for positive signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V21)
N: Scan operand for negative signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V21)
P_TRIG: Scan RLO for positive signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V21)
N_TRIG: Scan RLO for negative signal edge (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Safety functions
ESTOP1: Emergency STOP/emergency OFF up to stop category 1 (STEP 7 Safety V21)
TWO_HAND: Two-hand monitoring (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V21) (S7-300, S7-400)
TWO_H_EN: Two-hand monitoring with enable (STEP 7 Safety V21)
MUTING: Muting (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V21) (S7-300, S7-400)
MUT_P: Parallel muting (STEP 7 Safety V21)
EV1oo2DI: 1oo2 evaluation with discrepancy analysis (STEP 7 Safety V21)
FDBACK: Feedback monitoring (STEP 7 Safety V21)
SFDOOR: Safety door monitoring (STEP 7 Safety V21)
ACK_GL: Global acknowledgment of all F-I/O in an F-runtime group (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Timer operations
TP: Generate pulse (STEP 7 Safety V21)
TON: Generate on-delay (STEP 7 Safety V21)
TOF: Generate off-delay (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Counter operations
CTU: Count up (STEP 7 Safety V21)
CTD: Count down (STEP 7 Safety V21)
CTUD: Count up and down (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Comparator operations
CMP ==: Equal (STEP 7 Safety V21)
CMP <>: Not equal (STEP 7 Safety V21)
CMP >=: Greater or equal (STEP 7 Safety V21)
CMP <=: Less or equal (STEP 7 Safety V21)
CMP >: Greater than (STEP 7 Safety V21)
CMP <: Less than (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Math functions
ADD: Add (STEP 7 Safety V21)
SUB: Subtract (STEP 7 Safety V21)
MUL: Multiply (STEP 7 Safety V21)
DIV: Divide (STEP 7 Safety V21)
NEG: Create twos complement (STEP 7 Safety V21)
ABS: Form absolute value (STEP 7 Safety V21) (S7-1200, S7-1500)
Move operations
MOVE: Move value (STEP 7 Safety V21)
RD_ARRAY_I: Read value from INT F-array (STEP 7 Safety V21) (S7-1200 G2, S7-1500)
RD_ARRAY_DI: Read value from DINT F-array (STEP 7 Safety V21) (S7-1200 G2, S7-1500)
WR_FDB: Write value indirectly to an F-DB (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V21) (S7-300, S7-400)
RD_FDB: Read value indirectly from an F-DB (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V21) (S7-300, S7-400)
Conversion operations
CONVERT: Convert value (STEP 7 Safety V21)
BO_W: Convert 16 data elements of data type BOOL to a data element of data type WORD (STEP 7 Safety V21)
W_BO: Convert a data element of data type WORD to 16 data elements of data type BOOL (STEP 7 Safety V21)
SCALE: Scale (STEP 7 Safety V21)
SCALE_D: Scale to data type DINT (STEP 7 Safety V21) (S7-1200, S7-1500)
Program control operations
JMP: Jump if RLO = 1 (STEP 7 Safety V21)
JMPN: Jump if RLO = 0 (STEP 7 Safety V21)
LABEL: Jump label (STEP 7 Safety V21)
RET: Return (STEP 7 Safety V21)
OPN: Open global data block (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V21) (S7-300, S7-400)
Word logic operations
AND: AND logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V21)
OR: OR logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V21)
XOR: EXCLUSIVE OR logic operation (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Shift and rotate
SHR: Shift right (STEP 7 Safety V21)
SHL: Shift left (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Operating
ACK_OP: Fail-safe acknowledgment (STEP 7 Safety V21)
Additional instructions
LAD
---| |--- OV: Get status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V21) (S7-300, S7-400)
---| / |--- OV: Get negated status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V21) (S7-300, S7-400)
FBD
OV: Get status bit OV (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V21) (S7-300, S7-400)
Communication
PROFIBUS/PROFINET
SENDDP and RCVDP: Send and receive data via PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO (STEP 7 Safety V21)
S7 communication
SENDS7 and RCVS7: Communication via S7 connections (STEP 7 Safety Advanced V21) (S7-300, S7-400)
Monitoring and response times
Introduction
Configuring monitoring times
Configuring the monitoring times
Minimum monitoring time for the F-runtime group cycle time
Minimum monitoring time of the F-I/O access
Minimum monitoring time for communication via the SENDDP/RCVDP or SENDS7/RCVS7 instructions
Minimum monitoring time of communication with OPC UA Safety
Minimum monitoring time for communication with Flexible F-Link
Monitoring Time for Safety-Related Communication between F-Runtime Groups
Response Times of Safety Functions
Checklist
Checklist
Assignment of the F-BaseID during runtime (delayed transfer) (S7-1200 G2, S7-1500)
Assignment of the F-BaseID during runtime (delayed transfer)
Safety Extensions
BASEID_GEN
BASEID_DATA
BASEID_CODING
BASEID_HOST
PID control
Introduction
Purpose, conventions and supplementary information
Guide to the Function Manuals documentation
Information classes Function Manuals
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Basic tools
Tool support
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Safety instructions
General safety instructions
Warnings in this document
Industrial cybersecurity
Industrial cybersecurity (introduction)
Cybersecurity information
Cybersecurity information
Principles for control
Controlled system and actuators
Controlled systems
Characteristic values of the control section
Pulse controller
Response to setpoint changes and disturbances
Control Response at Different Feedback Structures
Selection of the controller structure for specified controlled systems
PID parameter settings
Configuring a software controller
Overview of software controller
Steps for the configuration of a software controller
Add technology objects
Configure technology objects
Call instruction in the user program
Downloading technology objects to device
Commissioning software controller
Save optimized PID parameter in the project
Working with multi-instance objects
Comparing values
Comparison display and boundary conditions
Comparing values
Parameter view
Introduction to the parameter view
Structure of the parameter view
Toolbar
Navigation
Parameter table
Opening the parameter view
Default setting of the parameter view
Working with the parameter view
Overview
Filtering the parameter table
Sorting the parameter table
Transferring parameter data to other editors
Indicating errors
Editing start values in the project
Status of configuration (offline)
Monitoring values online in the parameter view
Change display format of value
Create snapshot of monitor values
Modifying values
Comparing values
Applying values from the online program as start values
Initializing setpoints in the online program
Display instance DB of a technology object.
Using PID_Compact
Technology object PID_Compact
PID_Compact as of V2
Configuring PID_Compact as of V2
Basic settings as of V2
Introduction as of V2
Control mode as of V2
Setpoint as of V2
Process value as of V2
Output value as of V2
Process value settings as of V2
Scaling process value as of V2
Process value limits as of V2
Advanced settings as of V2
Process value monitoring as of V2
PWM limits as of V2
Output value as of V2
PID parameters V2
PID parameters V3
Commissioning PID_Compact as of V2
Pretuning as of V2
Fine tuning as of V2
"Manual" mode as of V2
Override control with PID_Compact as of V2
Simulating PID_Compact as of V2 with PLCSIM
PID_Compact V1
Configuring PID_Compact V1
Basic settings V1
Introduction V1
Control mode V1
Setpoint V1
Process value V1
Output value V1
Process value settings V1
Advanced settings V1
Process value monitoring V1
PWM limits V1
Output value limits V1
PID parameters V1
Commissioning PID_Compact V1
Commissioning V1
Pretuning V1
Fine tuning V1
"Manual" mode V1
Simulating PID_Compact V1 with PLCSIM
Using PID_3Step
Technology object PID_3Step
PID_3Step V2
Configuring PID_3Step V2
Basic settings V2
Introduction V2
Control mode V2
Setpoint V2
Process value V2
Position feedback V2
Output value V2
Process value settings V2
Process value scaling V2
Process value limits V2
Actuator settings V2
Actuator V2
Feedback scaling V2
Output value limits V2
Advanced settings V2
Process value monitoring V2
PID parameters V2
Commissioning PID_3Step V2
Pretuning V2
Fine tuning V2
Commissioning with manual PID parameters V2
Measuring the motor transition time V2
Simulating PID_3Step V2 with PLCSIM
PID_3Step V1
Configuring PID_3Step V1
Basic settings V1
Introduction V1
Control mode V1
Setpoint V1
Process value V1
Position feedback V1
Output value V1
Process value settings V1
Actuator settings V1
Advanced settings V1
Process value monitoring V1
PID parameters V1
Commissioning PID_3Step V1
Commissioning V1
Pretuning V1
Fine tuning V1
Commissioning with manual PID parameters V1
Measuring the motor transition time V1
Simulating PID_3Step V1 with PLCSIM
Using PID_Temp
Technology object PID_Temp
Configuring PID_Temp
Basic settings
Introduction
Controller type
Setpoint
Process value
Heating and cooling output value
Cascade
Process value settings
Process value limits
Process value scaling
Output settings
Basic settings of output
Output value limits and scaling
Advanced settings
Process value monitoring
PWM limits
PID parameters
Commissioning PID_Temp
Commissioning
Pretuning
Fine tuning
"Manual" mode
Substitute setpoint
Cascade commissioning
Cascade control with PID_Temp
Introduction
Program creation
Configuration
Commissioning
Substitute setpoint
Operating modes and fault response
Multi-zone controlling with PID_Temp
Override control with PID_Temp
Simulating PID_Temp with PLCSIM
Using PID basic functions
CONT_C
Technology object CONT_C
Configure controller difference CONT_C
Configure the controller algorithm CONT_C
Configure the output value CONT_C
Programming a pulse controller
Commissioning CONT_C
CONT_S
Technology object CONT_S
Configure controller difference CONT_S
Configuring control algorithm CONT_S
Configure manipulated value CONT_S
Commissioning CONT_S
TCONT_CP
Technology object TCONT_CP
Configure TCONT_CP
Controller difference
Controlling algorithm
Manipulated value continual controller
Manipulated value pulse controller
Commissioning TCONT_CP
Optimization of TCONT_CP
Requirements for an optimization
Possibilities for optimization
Tuning result
Parallel tuning of controller channels
Fault descriptions and corrective measures
Performing pretuning
Performing fine tuning
Cancelling pretuning or fine tuning
Manual fine-tuning in control mode
Performing fine tuning manually
TCONT_S
Technology object TCONT_S
Configure controller difference TCONT_S
Configure controller algorithm TCONT_S
Configure manipulated value TCONT_S
Commissioning TCONT_S
Auxiliary functions
Polyline
SplitRange
RampFunction
RampSoak
Filter_PT1
Filter_PT2
Filter_DT1
Filter_Universal
Instructions
PID_Compact
New features of PID_Compact
Compatibility with CPU and FW
CPU processing time and memory requirement PID_Compact as of V2
PID_Compact as of V2
Description of PID_Compact V3
Description of PID_Compact V2
PID_Compact as of V2 operating principle
Input parameters of PID_Compact as of V2
Output parameters of PID_Compact as of V2
In/out parameter of PID_Compact as of V2
Static tags of PID_Compact as of V2
Changing the interface of PID_Compact as of V2
State and Mode as of V2 parameters
ErrorBits as of V2 parameter
ActivateRecoverMode tag as of V2
Warning tag as of V2
Tag IntegralResetMode as of V2
Example program for PID_Compact V2
PID_Compact V1
Description of PID_Compact V1
Input parameters of PID_Compact V1
Output parameters of PID_Compact V1
Static tags of PID_Compact V1
Parameters State and sRet.i_Mode V1
Error V1 parameter
Reset V1 parameter
Tag sd_warning V1
Tag i_Event_SUT V1
Tag i_Event_TIR V1
PID_3Step
New features of PID_3Step
Compatibility with CPU and FW
CPU processing time and memory requirement PID_3Step V2.x
PID_3Step V2
Description of PID_3Step V2
Mode of operation of PID_3Step V2
Changing the PID_3Step V2 interface
Input parameters of PID_3Step V2
Output parameters of PID_3Step V2
In/out parameters of PID-3Step V2
Static tags of PID_3Step V2
State and Mode V2 parameters
ErrorBits V2 parameter
Tag ActivateRecoverMode V2
Tag Warning V2
PID_3Step V1
Description PID_3Step V1
Operating principle PID_3Step V1
PID_3Step V1 input parameters
PID_3Step V1 output parameters
PID_3Step V1 static tags
State and Retain.Mode V1 parameters
ErrorBits V1 parameter
Reset V1 parameter
Tag ActivateRecoverMode V1
Tag Warning V1
Tag SUT.State V1
Tag TIR.State V1
PID_Temp
New features of PID_Temp
Compatibility with CPU and FW
CPU processing time and memory requirement as of PID_Temp V1
PID_Temp
Description of PID_Temp
Mode of operation of PID_Temp
Input parameters of PID_Temp
Output parameters of PID_Temp
In/out parameters of PID_Temp V2
Static tags of PID_Temp
PID_Temp state and mode parameters
PID_Temp ErrorBits parameter
PID_Temp ActivateRecoverMode tag
PID_Temp Warning tag
PwmPeriode tag
IntegralResetMode tag
PID basic functions
CONT_C
Description CONT_C
How CONT_C works
CONT_C block diagram
Input parameter CONT_C
Output parameters CONT_C
CONT_S
Description CONT_S
Mode of operation CONT_S
Block diagram CONT_S
Input parameters CONT_S
Output parameters CONT_S
PULSEGEN
Description PULSEGEN
Mode of operation PULSEGEN
Mode of operation PULSEGEN
Three-step control
Two-step control
Input parameters PULSEGEN
Output parameter PULSEGEN
TCONT_CP
Description TCONT_CP
Mode of operation TCONT_CP
Operating principle of the pulse generator
Block diagram TCONT_CP
Input parameters TCONT_CP
Output parameters TCONT_CP
In/out parameters TCONT_CP
Static variables TCONT_CP
Parameter STATUS_H
Parameters STATUS_D
TCONT_S
Description TCONT_S
Mode of operation TCONT_S
Block diagram TCONT_S
Input paramters TCONT_S
Output parameters TCONT_S
In/out parameters TCONT_S
Static variables TCONT_S
Integrated system functions
CONT_C_SF
CONT_S_SF
PULSEGEN_SF
Polyline
Compatibility with CPU and FW
Description Polyline
Operating principle Polyline
Input parameters of Polyline
Output parameters of Polyline
Static tags of Polyline
ErrorBits parameter
SplitRange
Compatibility with CPU and FW
SplitRange description
SplitRange input parameters
SplitRange output parameters
SplitRange static tags
ErrorBits parameter
RampFunction
Compatibility with CPU and FW
RampFunction description
RampFunction mode of operation
RampFunction input parameters
RampFunction output parameters
RampFunction static tags
ErrorBits parameter
RampSoak
Compatibility with CPU and FW
Description of RampSoak
Operating principle RampSoak
Configuring and validating profile data
Executing a profile
Configuring the starting behavior - static tag StartMode
Configuring the stopping behavior - static tag StopMode
Measuring the cycle time
Enable behavior EN/ENO
Input parameter RampSoak
Output parameter RampSoak
In-out parameter RampSoak
Static tags RampSoak
ErrorBits parameter
Filter_PT1
Compatibility with CPU and FW
Description of Filter_PT1
Operating principle Filter_PT1
Input parameter Filter_PT1
Output parameter Filter_PT1
Static tags Filter_PT1
ErrorBits parameter
Filter_PT2
Compatibility with CPU and FW
Description of Filter_PT2
Operating principle Filter_PT2
Input parameter Filter_PT2
Output parameter Filter_PT2
Static tags Filter_PT2
ErrorBits parameter
Filter_DT1
Compatibility with CPU and FW
Description of Filter_DT1
Operating principle Filter_DT1
Input parameter Filter_DT1
Output parameter Filter_DT1
Static tags Filter_DT1
ErrorBits parameter
Filter_Universal
Compatibility with CPU and FW
Description Filter_Universal
Operating principle Filter_Universal
Filter parameters
Initializing output values
Final value in steady state
Use in time-critical applications
Call environment and automatic detection of the cycle time
Reset response
Enable behavior EN/ENO
Input parameter Filter_Universal
Output parameter Filter_Universal
Static tags Filter_Universal
ErrorBits parameter
High-precision input/output with Time-based IO
Preface
Preface
Industry Mall
Security information
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
Function Manuals Documentation Guide
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
SIMATIC Technical Documentation
Tool support
Tool support (ET 200SP R1)
Time-based IO basics
Using Time-based IO
Time behavior of Time-based IO
Time behavior of standard technology
Time-based IO properties
System environment
Hardware requirements
Configuration software requirements
Technical implementation
Configuring and parameter assignment
Requirements
Settings for Time-based IO
Programming
Overview of instructions
Programming of Time-based IO
Time-based IO
TIO_SYNC: Synchronizing TIO modules
TIO_DI: Reading in edges at digital input and associated time stamps
TIO_DI_ONCE: Reading in edges once at the digital input and associated time stamps
TIO_DQ: Output edges time-controlled at the digital output
UDT TIO_SYNC_Data

Back to home page